S71WS512NE0BFWZZ0 [SPANSION]

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP) Flash Memory and pSRAM CMOS 1.8 Volt; 堆叠式多芯片产品( MCP )闪存和PSRAM的CMOS 1.8伏
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ0
型号: S71WS512NE0BFWZZ0
厂家: SPANSION    SPANSION
描述:

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP) Flash Memory and pSRAM CMOS 1.8 Volt
堆叠式多芯片产品( MCP )闪存和PSRAM的CMOS 1.8伏

闪存 静态存储器
文件: 总142页 (文件大小:3046K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ  
Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP) Flash Memory  
and pSRAM CMOS 1.8 Volt,  
Simultaneous Operation, Burst Mode Flash Memory  
and Pseudo-Static RAM  
ADVANCE  
INFORMATION  
DISTINCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
The S71WS512 Series is a product line of stacked Multi-Chip  
Products (MCP) and consists of  
MCP Features  
„
Operating Voltage Range of 1.65 to 1.95 V  
„
One or more S29WS256N  
„
High Performance  
(Simultaneous Operation, Burst Mode) Flash Die  
— Speed: 54MHz  
„
pSRAM options  
„
„
Packages  
— 128Mb pSRAM  
— 96-ball FBGA—9 x 12 mm  
Operating Temperatures  
— Wireless: –25°C to +85°C  
The products covered by this document are listed below. For  
details about their specifications, please refer to the individual  
constituent data sheets for further details.  
MCP  
Number of S29WSxxxN  
Total Flash Density  
pSRAM Density  
S71WS512NE0  
2
512Mb  
256Mb  
Notes:  
1. This MCP is only guaranteed to operate @ 1.65 - 1.95 V regardless of component operating ranges.  
Publication Number S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00 Revision A Amendment 1 Issue Date June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Product Selector Guide  
FlashAccess RAMAccess  
Time (MHz) Time (MHz) Packages  
Device-Model #  
SRAM/pSRAM Density  
256Mb  
SRAM/pSRAM Type  
Supplier  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ  
pSRAM - x16  
COSMORAM 1  
54 54 TBD  
2
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Persistent Protection Bit Lock (PPB Lock Bit) in Password Sector  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ  
Protection Mode .............................................................................................33  
Lock Register .......................................................................................................34  
Table 6. Lock Register ........................................................ 34  
Hardware Data Protection Mode ................................................................. 34  
Write Protect (WP#) ................................................................................... 34  
Distinctive Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Product Selector Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
MCP Block Diagram of S71WS512NE0BFWZZ ...........................................6  
Low V Write Inhibit .................................................................................34  
CC  
Write Pulse “Glitch” Protection ............................................................... 35  
Logical Inhibit ................................................................................................... 35  
Power-Up Write Inhibit ............................................................................... 35  
Standby Mode ...................................................................................................... 35  
Automatic Sleep Mode ..................................................................................... 35  
RESET#: Hardware Reset Input ................................................................ 35  
Output Disable Mode ................................................................................... 36  
SecSi™ (Secured Silicon) Sector Flash Memory Region ..........................36  
Factory Locked: Factor SecSi Sector Programmed and Protected At  
the Factory .......................................................................................................36  
Table 7. SecSiTM Sector Addresses ........................................ 37  
Customer SecSi Sector ................................................................................. 37  
SecSi Sector Protection Bit ......................................................................... 37  
Common Flash Memory Interface (CFI) . . . . . . 37  
Table 8. CFI Query Identification String ................................ 38  
Table 9. System Interface String ......................................... 38  
Table 10. Device Geometry Definition ................................... 39  
Table 11. Primary Vendor-Specific Extended Query ................ 39  
Table 12. Sector Address / Memory Address Map for the WS256N  
........................................................................................41  
Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Connection Diagram of S71WS512NE0BFWZZ ..........................................7  
Special Package Handling Instructions ........................................................8  
Pin Description ..................................................................................................8  
Logic Symbol .....................................................................................................9  
Device Bus Operation ....................................................................................... 10  
Table 1. Device Bus Operations ........................................... 10  
Pin Capacitance ................................................................................................... 12  
Physical Dimensions TBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
XXX .........................................................................................................................13  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family  
For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
Distinctive Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Product Selector Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 19  
Block Diagram of Simultaneous Operation Circuit  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Input/Output Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Logic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Command Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
Reading Array Data ...........................................................................................49  
Set Configuration Register Command Sequence .....................................49  
Read Configuration Register Command Sequence ..................................50  
Figure 1. Synchronous/Asynchronous State Diagram.............. 50  
Read Mode Setting .........................................................................................50  
Programmable Wait State Configuration ...............................................50  
Table 13. Programmable Wait State Settings ......................... 51  
Programmable Wait State ............................................................................51  
Boundary Crossing Latency .........................................................................51  
Set Internal Clock Frequency ......................................................................51  
Table 14. Wait States for Handshaking ................................. 51  
Handshaking ......................................................................................................51  
Burst Sequence ............................................................................................... 52  
Burst Length Configuration .........................................................................52  
Table 15. Burst Length Configuration ................................... 52  
Burst Wrap Around ......................................................................................52  
Burst Active Clock Edge Configuration .................................................. 52  
RDY Configuration ........................................................................................52  
RDY Polarity ....................................................................................................52  
Configuration Register ...................................................................................... 53  
Table 16. Configuration Register .......................................... 53  
Reset Command ................................................................................................. 53  
Autoselect Command Sequence ....................................................................54  
Table 17. Autoselect Addresses ........................................... 54  
Enter SecSi™ Sector/Exit SecSi Sector Command Sequence ................ 55  
Word Program Command Sequence ........................................................... 55  
Write Buffer Programming Command Sequence .....................................56  
Table 18. Write Buffer Command Sequence .......................... 56  
Figure 2. Write Buffer Programming Operation ...................... 57  
Unlock Bypass Command Sequence ........................................................ 57  
Figure 3. Program Operation............................................... 58  
Device Bus Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Table 2. Device Bus Operations ........................................... 23  
Requirements for Asynchronous Read Operation (Non-Burst) ..........23  
Requirements for Synchronous (Burst) Read Operation ...................... 24  
Table 3. Address Dependent Additional Latency ..................... 24  
Continuous Burst ........................................................................................... 24  
8-, 16-, and 32-Word Linear Burst with Wrap Around ......................25  
Table 4. Burst Address Groups ............................................ 25  
8-, 16-, and 32-Word Linear Burst without Wrap Around ................25  
Configuration Register ......................................................................................25  
Handshaking ..........................................................................................................25  
Simultaneous Read/Write Operations with Zero Latency ................... 26  
Writing Commands/Command Sequences ................................................ 26  
Unlock Bypass Mode .................................................................................... 26  
Accelerated Program/Erase Operations ..................................................... 26  
Write Buffer Programming Operation .........................................................27  
Autoselect Mode ................................................................................................ 28  
Advanced Sector Protection and Unprotection ....................................... 29  
Persistent Mode Lock Bit ............................................................................ 29  
Password Mode Lock Bit ............................................................................. 30  
Sector Protection ............................................................................................... 30  
Persistent Sector Protection .......................................................................... 30  
Persistent Protection Bit (PPB) ...................................................................31  
Persistent Protection Bit Lock (PPB Lock Bit) in Persistent Sector  
Protection Mode ..............................................................................................31  
Dynamic Protection Bit (DYB) ....................................................................31  
Table 5. Sector Protection Schemes ..................................... 32  
Password Sector Protection ............................................................................33  
64-bit Password ...............................................................................................33  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
3
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Figure 22. Synchronous Program Operation Timings: CLK Latched  
Chip Erase Command Sequence ................................................................... 58  
Sector Erase Command Sequence .................................................................59  
Erase Suspend/Erase Resume Commands ..................................................60  
Figure 4. Erase Operation.................................................... 61  
Program Suspend/Program Resume Commands ...................................... 61  
Lock Register Command Set Definitions ................................................... 62  
Password Protection Command Set Definitions ..................................... 62  
Non-Volatile Sector Protection Command Set Definitions ..................63  
Global Volatile Sector Protection Freeze Command Set ..................... 64  
Volatile Sector Protection Command Set ...................................................65  
SecSi Sector Entry Command .........................................................................65  
Command Definition Summary ..................................................................... 66  
Write Operation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
DQ7: Data# Polling ........................................................................................... 69  
Figure 5. Data# Polling Algorithm......................................... 70  
RDY: Ready .......................................................................................................... 70  
DQ6: Toggle Bit I ............................................................................................... 70  
Figure 6. Toggle Bit Algorithm.............................................. 71  
DQ2: Toggle Bit II ...............................................................................................72  
Table 19. DQ6 and DQ2 Indications ..................................... 72  
Reading Toggle Bits DQ6/DQ2 ......................................................................72  
DQ5: Exceeded Timing Limits ........................................................................73  
DQ3: Sector Erase Timer .................................................................................73  
DQ1: Write to Buffer Abort ............................................................................73  
Table 20. Write Operation Status ......................................... 74  
Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
Figure 7. Maximum Negative Overshoot Waveform................. 75  
Figure 8. Maximum Positive Overshoot Waveform .................. 75  
Operating Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
DC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
CMOS Compatible .............................................................................................76  
Test Conditions ...................................................................................................77  
Figure 9. Test Setup ........................................................... 77  
Table 21. Test Specifications ............................................... 77  
Switching Waveforms ........................................................................................77  
Table 22. Key to Switching Waveforms ................................. 77  
Figure 10. Input Waveforms and Measurement Levels............. 77  
Addresses......................................................................... 88  
Figure 23. Accelerated Unlock Bypass Programming Timing..... 88  
Figure 24. Data# Polling Timings (During Embedded Algorithm)...  
........................................................................................ 89  
Figure 25. Toggle Bit Timings (During Embedded Algorithm)... 89  
Figure 26. Synchronous Data Polling Timings/Toggle Bit Timings ..  
........................................................................................ 90  
Figure 27. DQ2 vs. DQ6 ..................................................... 90  
Figure 28. Latency with Boundary Crossing when Frequency > 66  
MHz................................................................................. 91  
Figure 29. Latency with Boundary Crossing into Program/Erase  
Bank................................................................................ 91  
Figure 30. Example of Wait States Insertion.......................... 92  
Figure 31. Back-to-Back Read/Write Cycle Timings ................ 92  
Erase and Programming Performance . . . . . . . . 93  
128Mb pSRAM  
FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
FUNCTION TRUTH TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Asynchronous Operation (Page Mode) .....................................................95  
FUNCTION TRUTH TABLE (Continued) . . . . 96  
Synchronous Operation (Burst Mode) .......................................................96  
STATE DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Power-up ...............................................................................................................98  
Configuration Register ......................................................................................98  
CR Set Sequence ................................................................................................98  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Continued) . . 99  
Address Key .........................................................................................................99  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Continued) . 100  
Power Down ......................................................................................................100  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Continued) . . 101  
Burst Read/Write Operation ..........................................................................101  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Continued) . 102  
CLK Input Function ..........................................................................................102  
ADV# Input Function .......................................................................................102  
WAIT# Output Function ................................................................................102  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Continued) . . 103  
Latency ..................................................................................................................103  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Continued) . 104  
Address Latch by ADV# .................................................................................104  
Burst Length ........................................................................................................104  
Single Write .........................................................................................................104  
Write Control ....................................................................................................105  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Continued) . 106  
Burst Read Suspend ..........................................................................................106  
Burst Write Suspend ........................................................................................106  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Continued) . . 107  
Burst Read Termination ..................................................................................107  
Burst Write Termination ................................................................................107  
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS (See  
V
Power-up ..................................................................................................... 78  
CC  
Figure 11. VCC Power-up Diagram ........................................ 78  
Pin Capacitance .................................................................................................. 78  
AC Characteristics—Synchronous . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
CLK Characterization ........................................................................................79  
Figure 12. CLK Characterization ........................................... 79  
Synchronous/Burst Read @ V = 1.8 V .....................................................80  
IO  
Timing Diagrams .................................................................................................. 81  
Figure 13. CLK Synchronous Burst Mode Read (rising active CLK).  
....................................................................................... 81  
Figure 14. Synchronous Burst Mode Read.............................. 82  
Figure 15. Eight-word Linear Burst with Wrap Around ............. 82  
Figure 16. Eight-word Linear Burst without Wrap Around......... 83  
Figure 17. Linear Burst with RDY Set One Cycle Before Data.... 83  
AC Characteristics—Asynchronous . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Asynchronous Mode Read @ V pS = 1.8 V .............................................84  
IO  
Timing Diagrams .................................................................................................84  
Figure 18. Asynchronous Mode Read with Latched Addresses... 84  
Figure 19. Asynchronous Mode Read..................................... 85  
Hardware Reset (RESET#) .............................................................................. 85  
Figure 20. Reset Timings..................................................... 85  
WARNING below.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS  
(See WARNING below.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
(Referenced to VSS) ................................................................................... 108  
DC CHARACTERISTICS  
. . . . . (Under Recommended Operating Conditions  
unless otherwise noted) . . . . . . . . Note *1,*2,*3 109  
Erase/Program Operations @ V = 1.8 V .................................................86  
IO  
Figure 21. Asynchronous Program Operation Timings: WE#  
Latched Addresses ............................................................. 87  
4
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
AC CHARACTERISTICS  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Asynchronous Read / Write Timing #1-1 (CE#1 Control) ...................124  
Asynchronous Read / Write Timing #1-2 (CE#1 / WE# / OE# Control)  
..................................................................................................................................124  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Asynchronous Read / Write Timing #2 (OE#, WE# Control) ........125  
Asynchronous Read / Write Timing #3 (OE#, WE#, LB#, UB# Control)  
..................................................................................................................................125  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Clock Input Timing ..........................................................................................126  
Address Latch Timing (Synchronous Mode) ............................................126  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Synchronous Read Timing #1 (OE# Control) .........................................127  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Synchronous Read Timing #2 (CE#1 Control) ........................................128  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Synchronous Read Timing #3 (ADV# Control) .....................................129  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Synchronous Write Timing #1 (WE# Level Control) ...........................130  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Synchronous Write Timing #2 (WE# Single Clock Pulse Control) ..131  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Synchronous Write Timing #3 (ADV# Control) ...................................132  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Synchronous Write Timing #4 (WE# Level Control, Single Write) 133  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Synchronous Read to Write Timing #1(CE#1 Control) .......................134  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Synchronous Read to Write Timing #2(ADV# Control) ....................135  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Synchronous Write to Read Timing #1 (CE#1 Control) ......................136  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Synchronous Write to Read Timing #2 (ADV# Control) ..................137  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
POWER-UP Timing #1 ....................................................................................138  
POWER-UP Timing #2 ...................................................................................138  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
POWER DOWN Entry and Exit Timing ..................................................139  
Standby Entry Timing after Read or Write ..............................................139  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
Configuration Register Set Timing #1 (Asynchronous Operation) ...140  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Configuration Register Set Timing #2 (Synchronous Operation) .....141  
(Under Recommended Operating Conditions  
unless otherwise noted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
ASYNCHRONOUS READ OPERATION (PAGE MODE) ................110  
AC CHARACTERISTICS (Continued) . . . . . . . . 111  
ASYNCHRONOUS WRITE OPERATION .............................................111  
AC CHARACTERISTICS (Continued) . . . . . . . . 112  
SYNCHRONOUS OPERATION - CLOCK INPUT (BURST MODE)  
..................................................................................................................................112  
SYNCHRONOUS OPERATION - ADDRESS LATCH (BURST MODE)  
..................................................................................................................................112  
AC CHARACTERISTICS (Continued) . . . . . . . . 113  
SYNCHRONOUS READ OPERATION (BURST MODE) ................ 113  
AC CHARACTERISTICS (Continued) . . . . . . . . 114  
SYNCHRONOUS WRITE OPERATION (BURST MODE) ..............114  
AC CHARACTERISTICS (Continued) . . . . . . . . 115  
POWER DOWN PARAMETERS ............................................................... 115  
OTHER TIMING PARAMETERS .................................................................115  
AC CHARACTERISTICS (Continued) . . . . . . . . 116  
AC TEST CONDITIONS ...............................................................................116  
AC MEASUREMENT OUTPUT LOAD CIRCUIT .................................116  
TIMING DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Asynchronous Read Timing #1-1 (Basic Timing) ...................................... 117  
Asynchronous Read Timing #1-2 (Basic Timing) ...................................... 117  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Asynchronous Read Timing #2 (OE# & Address Access) ...................118  
Asynchronous Read Timing #3 (LB# / UB# Byte Access) ..................118  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Asynchronous Read Timing #4 (Page Address Access after CE#1 Control  
Access) ..................................................................................................................119  
Asynchronous Read Timing #5 (Random and Page Address Access) 119  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Asynchronous Write Timing #1-1 (Basic Timing) ...................................120  
Asynchronous Write Timing #1-2 (Basic Timing) ...................................120  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Asynchronous Write Timing #2 (WE# Control) ...................................121  
Asynchronous Write Timing #3-1 (WE# / LB# / UB# Byte Write Con-  
trol) ........................................................................................................................121  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Asynchronous Write Timing #3-2 (WE# / LB# / UB# Byte Write Con-  
trol) .......................................................................................................................122  
Asynchronous Write Timing #3-3 (WE# / LB# / UB# Byte Write Con-  
trol) .......................................................................................................................122  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Asynchronous Write Timing #3-4 (WE# / LB# / UB# Byte Write Con-  
trol) ....................................................................................................................... 123  
Revision Summary  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
5
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Block Diagrams  
MCP Block Diagram of S71WS512NE0BFWZZ  
VCCf_1  
VSS  
A23 to A0  
AVD#  
CLK  
WE#  
256 M bit  
Burst  
Flash Memory_1  
RDY  
OE#  
RESET#  
CE#f1  
VCCf_2  
VSS  
A
23 to A0  
256 M bit  
Burst  
Flash Memory_2  
ACC  
WP#  
CE#f2  
DQ15 to DQ0  
VCCpS  
VSS VIOpS  
A22 to A0  
128 M bit  
pSRAM_1  
LB#  
UB#  
CE#1pS-1  
CE2pS-1  
VCCpS  
VSS VIOpS  
128 M bit  
pSRAM_2  
CE#1pS-2  
CE2pS-2  
6
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Connection Diagrams  
Connection Diagram of S71WS512NE0BFWZZ  
96-Ball FBGA  
Top View  
A1  
NC  
B1  
NC  
A2  
NC  
A9  
NC  
A10  
NC  
B2  
B9  
NC  
B10  
NC  
NC  
C2  
AVD#  
D2  
WP#  
E2  
C3  
VSS  
D3  
A7  
C4  
CLK  
D4  
LB#  
E4  
C5  
CE#f2  
D5  
C6  
RFU  
D6  
WE#  
E6  
C7  
RFU  
D7  
A8  
C8  
RFU  
D8  
A11  
E8  
C9  
RFU  
D9  
RFU  
E9  
A15  
F9  
A21  
G9  
A22  
H9  
A16  
J9  
ACC  
E5  
E3  
A6  
E7  
A19  
F7  
A9  
A3  
UB#s  
F4  
RST#f CE2pS_  
1
A12  
F8  
F2  
F3  
A5  
F5  
RDY  
G5  
F6  
A20  
G6  
A23  
H6  
A2  
A18  
G4  
A13  
G8  
A14  
H8  
RFU  
J8  
G2  
A1  
G3  
A4  
G7  
A10  
H7  
A17 CE#1pS2  
H2  
A0  
H3  
VSS  
J3  
H4  
DQ1  
J4  
H5  
VCCp  
J5  
S
CE2pS_2 DQ6  
J2  
J6  
J7  
DQ13  
K7  
DQ3  
DQ4  
CE#f1  
K2  
OE#  
K3  
DQ0  
L3  
DQ9  
K4  
DQ15  
K8  
RFU  
K9  
VSS  
L9  
K5  
K6  
CE#1pS_1  
L2  
DQ10 VCCf_1 VIOp  
S
DQ12  
L7  
DQ7  
L8  
L4  
DQ2  
M4  
VSS  
L5  
DQ11  
M5  
L6  
RFU  
M2  
RFU  
N2  
NC  
DQ8  
M3  
RFU  
RFU  
M6  
RFU  
DQ5  
M7  
RFU  
DQ14  
M8  
RFU  
RFU  
M9  
RFU  
N9  
NC  
VCC f_2  
N1  
NC  
N10  
NC  
P1  
NC  
P2  
P9  
NC  
P10  
NC  
NC  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
7
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Special Package Handling Instructions  
Special handling is required for Flash Memory products in molded packages  
(FBGA). The package and/or data integrity may be compromised if the package  
body is exposed to temperatures above 150°C for prolonged periods of time.  
Pin Description  
A22–A0  
A23  
DQ15–DQ0  
CE#f  
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
23 Address Inputs (Common)  
1 Address Inputs (Flash)  
16 Data Inputs/Outputs (Common)  
Chip Enable (Flash)  
CE#1pS  
CE#2pS  
OE#  
WE#  
RDY  
CLK  
AVD#  
UB#  
LB#  
RESET#  
WP#  
Chip Enable1 (pSRAM)  
Chip Enable2 (pSRAM)  
Output Enable (Common)  
Write Enable (Common)  
Ready Output  
Clock Input  
Address Valid Input  
Upper Byte Control (SRAM)  
Lower Byte Control (SRAM)  
Hardware Reset Pin, Active Low (Flash)  
Hardware Write Protect (Flash)  
Acceleration pin (Flash)  
ACC  
V
f
Flash 1.8 volt-only single power supply (see Product  
Selector Guide for speed options and voltage supply  
tolerances)  
CC  
V
s
=
=
=
=
=
pSRAM Power Supply  
CCp  
VIO s  
pSRAM Output buffer Power Supply  
Device Ground (Common)  
Pin Not Connected Internally  
Reserved for Future Use  
p
V
ss  
NC  
RFU  
8
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Logic Symbol  
23  
A22–A0  
A23  
16  
CE#f  
DQ15–DQ0  
RDY  
CE1#pS  
CE2s  
OE#  
WE#  
WP#/ACC  
RESET#  
UB#  
LB#  
„ NOR Flash and pSRAM and DATA STORAGE densities up to 4 Gigabits  
The signal locations of the resultant MCP device are shown above. Note that for different densities, the actual package  
outline may vary. Any pinout in any MCP, however, will be a subset of the pinout above.  
In some cases, there may be outrigger balls in locations outside the grid shown above. In such cases, the user is rec-  
ommended to treat them as reserved and not connect them to any other signal.  
For any further inquiries about the above look-ahead pinout, please refer to the ap-  
plication note on this subject or contact your sales office.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
9
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Device Bus Operation  
Table 1. Device Bus Operations  
Operation  
(Asynchronous) - Flash  
DQ15-  
DQ0  
CLK(See  
Note)  
CE#f1 CE#f2 CE#1pS_1 CE2pS_1 CE#1pS_2 CE2pS_2 OE#  
WE# Addr  
UB#  
LB#  
RESET# WP# ACC#  
AVD#  
L
H
L
H
L
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
X
L
L
H
L
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
X
H
H
H
L
H
L
Read - Address Latched  
L
L
H
H
L
Valid  
Valid  
Valid  
Valid  
X
X
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
X
X
X
H
L
Read - Address Steady  
State  
Valid  
Valid  
X
X
X
X
L
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
Write  
H
H
H
X
H
H
L
H
H
X
H
H
H
H
H
X
H
H
H
Standby  
Reset  
H
X
H
L
X
X
X
X
X
X
High-Z  
High-Z  
X
X
X
X
H
L
H
H
H
H
X
X
X
X
Output Disable  
H
H
H
H
X
X
X
X
H
H
H
X
X
AVD#  
H
H
Operation(Synchronous) -  
Flash  
DQ15-  
DQ0  
CLK(See  
Note)  
CE#f1 CE#f2 CE#1pS_1 CE2pS_1 CE#1pS_2 CE2pS_2 OE#  
WE# Addr  
UB#  
LB#  
RESET# WP# ACC#  
L
H
L
H
L
H
H
H
H
L
H
L
H
H
H
H
L
H
L
Load Starting Burst  
Adress  
X
L
H
H
Valid  
X
Data  
Data  
X
X
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
L
Advance Burst Read to  
Next Address  
X
X
H
H
H
Terminate current Burst  
read cycle  
H
X
H
X
H
X
H
X
H
X
H
X
X
X
H
H
X
X
High-Z  
High-Z  
X
X
X
X
H
L
H
H
H
H
X
X
"Terminate current Burst  
read cycle via RESET#"  
X
"Terminate current Burst  
read cycle and start new  
Burst read cycle"  
L
H
L
H
H
L
H
H
L
X
H
Valid  
Valid  
X
X
H
H
H
H
H
H
Operation  
(Asyncronous) - pSRAM  
DQ15-  
DQ0  
CLK(See  
Note)  
CE#f1 CE#f2 CE#1pS_1 CE2pS_1 CE#1pS_2 CE2pS_2 OE#  
WE# Addr  
UB#  
LB#  
RESET# WP# ACC#  
AVD#  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
L
H
L
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
L
H
H
H
H
H
H
Read  
Read (Page)  
Write  
L
L
H
H
L
Valid  
Valid  
Valid  
Valid  
Valid  
Valid  
L
L
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
X
X
X
H/L  
H
L
H/L  
L
H/L  
L
H/L  
H
L
H
L
H
*note  
H
Invalid(  
DQ0-8)  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
L
H
L
H
H
H
H
H
L
H
H
H
H
Write(Upper Byte)  
Write(Lower Byte)  
H
H
L
L
Valid  
Valid  
L
H
L
H
H
H
H
H
H
X
X
*note  
*note  
Valid(DQ  
9-15)  
Valid(DQ  
0-8)  
H
L
H
Invalid(  
DQ9-15)  
H
Standby  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
X
L
H
L
H
X
L
H
L
H
X
H
H
X
H
X
X
X
High-Z  
High-Z  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
X
X
X
*note  
X
PowerDown  
Output Disable  
H
H
*note  
Operation(Syncronous) -  
pSRAM  
DQ15-  
DQ0  
CLK(See  
Note)  
CE#f1 CE#f2 CE#1pS_1 CE2pS_1 CE#1pS_2 CE2pS_2 OE#  
WE# Addr  
UB#  
LB#  
RESET# WP# ACC#  
AVD#  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
L
H
L
H
H
H
H
H
L
Load Starting Burst  
Adress  
X
H
Valid  
Data  
X
X
H
H
H
H
L
Advance Burst Read to  
Next Address  
L
H
H
X
X
Data  
X
X
X
X
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
X
H
Terminate current Burst  
read cycle  
H
H
H
H
H
H
X
High-Z  
"Terminate current Burst  
read cycle and start new  
Burst read cycle"  
H
H
H
H
H
H
L
H
H
L
X
H
Valid  
Valid  
X
X
H
H
H
H
H
Legend: L = Logic 0, H = Logic 1, X = Don’t Care.  
Note: Default active edge of CLK is the rising edge. Ordering Information  
10  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
The order number (Valid Combination) is formed by the following:  
S
71  
W
S
512  
N
E
0
B
F
W
ZZ  
0
PACKING TYPE  
0
2
3
= Tray  
= 7” Tape & Reel  
= 13” Tape & Reel  
Additional ordering options  
See Product Selector Guide  
TEMPERATURE (and RELIABILITY) GRADE  
E
W
I
= Engineering Samples  
= Wireless (-25 C to +85  
= Industrial (-40 C to +85  
°
°
C)  
°
°C)  
PACKAGE MATERIAL SET (BGA Package Type)  
A
= Standard (Pb-free compliant) Package  
F
= Lead (Pb)-free Package  
PACKAGE TYPE  
B
= BGA Package  
CHIP CONTENTS—2  
0
= No second content  
CHIP CONTENTS—1  
8
A
B
C
E
= 8 Mb  
= 16 Mb  
= 32 Mb  
= 64 Mb  
= 256 Mb (two 128Mb)  
Spansion FLASH MEMORY PROCESS TECHNOLOGY  
(Highest-density Flash described in Characters 4-8)  
N
= 110 nm MirrorBitTM Technology  
BASE NOR FLASH DENSITY  
512  
= two S29WS256N  
BASE NOR FLASH CORE VOLTAGE  
S
= 1.8-volt VCC  
BASE NOR FLASH INTERFACE and SIMULTANEOUS READ/  
WRITE  
W
= Simultaneous Read/Write, Burst  
PRODUCT FAMILY  
71  
= Flash Base + xRAM.  
PREFIX  
S
= Spansion  
Valid Combinations  
Valid Combinations list configurations planned to be supported in volume for this device.  
Consult the local sales office to confirm availability of specific valid combinations and to  
check on newly released combinations.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
11  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Valid Combinations  
Flash Access  
Time (MHz)  
(p)SRAM Access  
Time (MHz)  
Te mpera ture  
Range  
Order Number  
Package Marking  
Supplier  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ  
71WS512NE0BFWZZ  
54  
54  
-25C to +85C  
Supplier 1  
Pin Capacitance  
Symbol  
CIN1  
Parameter  
Test Condition  
VIN=0  
Typ  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
Max  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
Unit  
pF  
Input Capacitance  
Output Capacitance  
Control Capacitance  
CIN2  
Vout=0  
pF  
Cout  
VIN=0  
pF  
12  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Physical Dimensions TBD  
XXX  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
13  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family  
For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
S29WS256N  
256 Megabit (16 M x 16-Bit) CMOS 1.8 Volt-only  
Simultaneous Read/Write, Burst Mode Flash Memory  
Distinctive Characteristics  
„
Power dissipation (typical values, CL = 30 pF) @  
66 MHz  
— Continuous Burst Mode Read: <28 mA  
— Simultaneous Operation: <50 mA  
— Program: <35 mA  
Architectural Advantages  
„
„
„
Single 1.8 volt read, program and erase (1.65 to  
1.95 volt)  
Manufactured on 110 nm MirrorBitTM process  
technology  
— Erase: <35 mA  
— Standby mode: <20 µA  
Simultaneous Read/Write operation  
— Data can be continuously read from one bank while  
executing erase/program functions in another bank  
— Zero latency between read and write operations  
— Sixteen bank architecture: Each bank consists of  
16Mb (WS256N)  
Hardware Features  
„
Sector Protection  
— Write protect (WP#) function allows protection of  
eight outermost boot sectors, four at top and four at  
bottom of memory, regardless of sector protect  
status  
„
Programable Burst Interface  
— 2 Modes of Burst Read Operation  
— Linear Burst: 32, 16, and 8 words with or without  
wrap-around  
„
„
Handshaking feature available  
— Provides host system with minimum possible latency  
by monitoring RDY  
— Continuous Sequential Burst  
„
„
SecSiTM (Secured Silicon) Sector region  
— 256 words accessible through a command  
sequence, 128 words for the Factory SecSi Sector  
and 128 words for the Customer SecSi Sector.  
Sector Architecture  
Hardware reset input (RESET#)  
— Hardware method to reset the device for reading  
array data  
„
„
Boot Option  
— Dual Boot  
CMOS compatible inputs, CMOS compatible  
outputs  
— S29WS256N: Eight 16 Kword sectors and two-  
hundred-fifty-four 64 Kword sectors  
— Banks 0 and 15 each contain 16 Kword sectors and  
64 Kword sectors; Other banks each contain 64  
Kword sectors  
„
Low VCC write inhibit  
— Eight 16 Kword boot sectors, four at the top of the  
address range, and four at the bottom of the  
address range  
100,000 erase cycles per sector typical  
20-year data retention typical  
Security Features  
„
Advanced Sector Protection consists of the two  
following modes of operation  
„
„
„
Persistent Sector Protection  
— A command sector protection method to lock  
combinations of individual sectors to prevent  
program or erase operations within that sector  
Performance Characteristics  
„
Read access times at 66/54 MHz @ 1.8V VIO (1.65  
- 1.95V)  
— Sectors can be locked and unlocked in-system at VCC  
level  
— Burst access times of 11.2/13.5 ns for 1.8V VIO (@  
30 pF at industrial temperature range)  
„
Password Sector Protection  
— Synchronous initial latency of 69/69 ns for 1.8V VIO  
(@ 30 pF at industrial temperature range)  
— Asynchronous random access times of 70/70 ns for  
1.8V VIO (@ 30 pF at industrial temperature range)  
High Performance  
— A sophisticated sector protection method to lock  
combinations of individual sectors to prevent  
program or erase operations within that sector using  
a user-defined 64-bit password  
„
— Typical word programming time of < 40 µs  
— Typical effective word programming time of <9.4 µs  
utilizing a 32-Word Write Buffer at Vcc Level  
— Typical effective word programming time of <4 µs  
utilizing a 32-Word Write Buffer at ACC Level  
— Typical sector erase time of <150 ms for both 16  
Kword sectors and <400 ms sector erase time for 64  
Kword sectors  
Software Features  
„
Supports Common Flash Memory Interface (CFI)  
„
Software command set compatible with JEDEC  
42.4 standards  
„
Data# Polling and toggle bits  
— Provides a software method of detecting program  
and erase operation completion  
14  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
„
„
„
Erase Suspend/Resume  
Additional Features  
— Suspends an erase operation to read data from, or  
program data to, a sector that is not being erased,  
then resumes the erase operation  
„
„
Program Operation  
— Ability to perform synchronous and asynchronous  
program operation independent of burst control  
register setting  
Program Suspend/Resume  
— Suspends a programming operation to read data  
from a sector other than the one being programmed,  
then resume the programming operation  
ACC input pin  
— Acceleration function reduces programming time in  
a factory setting.  
Unlock Bypass Program command  
— Reduces overall programming time when issuing  
multiple program command sequences  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
15  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
General Description  
The WSxxxN is a 256 Mbit, 1.8 Volt-only, simultaneous Read/Write, Burst Mode  
Flash memory device, organized as 16 Mwords of 16 bits. This device uses a sin-  
gle V of 1.65 to 1.95 V to read, program, and erase the memory array. A 9.0-  
CC  
volt V  
on ACC may be used for faster program performance if desired. The de-  
HH  
vice can be programmed in standard EPROM programmers.  
At 66 MHz and 1.8V V , the device provides a burst access of 11.2 ns at 30 pF  
IO  
with am initial latency of 69 ns at 30 pF. At 54 MHz and 1.8V V , the device pro-  
IO  
vides a burst access of 13.5 ns at 30 pF with an initial latency of 69 ns at 30 pF.  
The device operates within the industrial temperature range of -40°C to +85°C  
or wireless temperature range of -25°C to +80°C. These devices are offered in  
MCP compatible FBGA packages. See the product selector guide for details  
The Simultaneous Read/Write architecture provides simultaneous operation  
by dividing the memory space into sixteen banks. The device can improve over-  
all system performance by allowing a host system to program or erase in one  
bank, then immediately and simultaneously read from another bank, with zero  
latency. This releases the system from waiting for the completion of program or  
erase operations.  
The device is divided as shown in the following table:  
Quantity of Sectors  
Bank  
(WS256N)  
Sector Size  
16 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
16 Kwords  
4/4/4  
0
15/7/3  
16/8/4  
16/8/4  
16/8/4  
16/8/4  
16/8/4  
16/8/4  
16/8/4  
16/8/4  
16/8/4  
16/8/4  
16/8/4  
16/8/4  
16/8/4  
16/8/4  
15/7/3  
4/4/4  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
The VersatileIO™ (V ) control allows the host system to set the voltage levels  
IO  
that the device generates at its data outputs and the voltages tolerated at its  
data inputs to the same voltage level that is asserted on the V pin.  
IO  
The device uses Chip Enable (CE#), Write Enable (WE#), Address Valid (AVD#)  
and Output Enable (OE#) to control asynchronous read and write operations.  
For burst operations, the device additionally requires Ready (RDY), and Clock  
(CLK). This implementation allows easy interface with minimal glue logic to a  
16  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
wide range of microprocessors/microcontrollers for high performance read  
operations.  
The burst read mode feature gives system designers flexibility in the interface to  
the device. The user can preset the burst length and then wrap or non-wrap  
through the same memory space, or read the flash array in continuous mode.  
The clock polarity feature provides system designers a choice of active clock  
edges, either rising or falling. The active clock edge initiates burst accesses and  
determines when data will be output.  
The device is entirely command set compatible with the JEDEC 42.4 single-  
power-supply Flash standard. Commands are written to the command regis-  
ter using standard microprocessor write timing. Register contents serve as  
inputs to an internal state-machine that controls the erase and programming  
circuitry. Write cycles also internally latch addresses and data needed for the  
programming and erase operations. Reading data out of the device is similar to  
reading from other Flash or EPROM devices.  
Device programming occurs by executing the program command sequence. This  
initiates the Write Buffer Programming algorithm - an internal algorithm that  
automatically times the program pulse widths and verifies proper cell margin.  
This feature provides superior programming performance by grouping locations  
being programmed.The Unlock Bypass mode facilitates faster program times  
by requiring only two write cycles to program data instead of four.  
Device erasure occurs by executing the erase command sequence. This initiates  
the Embedded Erase algorithm - an internal algorithm that automatically pre-  
programs the array (if it is not already programmed) before executing the erase  
operation. During erase, the device automatically times the erase pulse widths  
and verifies proper cell margin.  
The Program Suspend/Program Resume feature enables the user to put  
program on hold for any period of time to read data from any sector that is not  
selected for programming. If a read is needed from the SecSi Sector area (One  
Time Program area), Persistent Protection area, Dynamic Protection area, or the  
CFI area, after an program suspend, then the user must use the proper com-  
mand sequence to enter and exit this region. The program suspend/resume  
functionality is also available when programming in erase suspend (1 level depth  
only).  
The Erase Suspend/Erase Resume feature enables the user to put erase on  
hold for any period of time to read data from, or program data to, any sector  
that is not selected for erasure. True background erase can thus be achieved. If  
a read is needed from the SecSi Sector area (One Time Program area), Persis-  
tent Protection area, Dynamic Protection area, or the CFI area, after an erase  
suspend, then the user must use the proper command sequence to enter and  
exit this region.  
The hardware RESET# pin terminates any operation in progress and resets  
the internal state machine to reading array data. The RESET# pin may be tied to  
the system reset circuitry. A system reset would thus also reset the device, en-  
abling the system microprocessor to read boot-up firmware from the Flash  
memory device.  
The host system can detect whether a program or erase operation is complete  
by using the device status bit DQ7 (Data# Polling), DQ6/DQ2 (toggle bits), DQ5  
(exceeded timing limit), DQ3 (sector erase timer), and DQ1 (write to buffer  
abort). After a program or erase cycle has been completed, the device automat-  
ically returns to reading array data.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
17  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
The sector erase architecture allows memory sectors to be erased and repro-  
grammed without affecting the data contents of other sectors. The device is fully  
erased when shipped from the factory.  
Hardware data protection measures include a low V detector that automat-  
CC  
ically inhibits write operations during power transitions. The device also offers  
two types of data protection at the sector level. When at V , WP# locks the  
IL  
four outermost boot sectors at the top of memory and four outermost boot sec-  
tors at the bottom of memory.  
When the ACC pin = V , the entire flash memory array is protected.  
IL  
The device offers two power-saving features. When addresses have been stable  
for a specified amount of time, the device enters the automatic sleep mode.  
The system can also place the device into the standby mode. Power consump-  
tion is greatly reduced in both modes.  
SpansionTM Flash memory products combine years of Flash memory manufactur-  
ing experience to produce the highest levels of quality, reliability and cost  
effectiveness. The device electrically erases all bits within a sector simulta-  
neously via Fowler-Nordheim tunnelling. The data is programmed using hot  
electron injection.  
18  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Product Selector Guide  
Part Number  
Option  
S29WS256N  
1.65–1.95 V  
V
IO  
Speed Option (Burst Frequency) (Note 1)  
Max Synchronous Latency, ns (tIACC  
66 MHz  
69  
54 MHz  
69  
)
Max Synchronous Burst Access Time, ns (tBACC  
Max Asynchronous Access Time tCE), ns  
Max CE# Access Time, ns (tCE), ns  
)
11.2  
70  
13.5  
70  
70  
70  
Max OE# Access Time, ns (tOE  
)
11.2  
13.5  
Block Diagram  
VCC  
DQ15DQ0  
VSS  
VSSIO  
VIO  
RDY  
Buffer  
RDY  
Erase Voltage  
Generator  
Input/Output  
Buffers  
WE#  
RESET#  
WP#  
State  
Control  
ACC  
Command  
Register  
PGM Voltage  
Generator  
Data  
Latch  
Chip Enable  
Output Enable  
Logic  
CE#  
OE#  
Y-Decoder  
Y-Gating  
VCC  
Detector  
Timer  
Cell Matrix  
X-Decoder  
Burst  
State  
Control  
Burst  
Address  
Counter  
AVD#  
CLK  
Amax–A0*  
*WS256N: A23-A0  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
19  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Block Diagram of Simultaneous Operation Circuit  
V
CC  
V
V
SS  
IO  
Bank Address  
DQ15–DQ0  
Bank 0  
Amax–A0  
X-Decoder  
OE#  
Bank Address  
DQ15–DQ0  
Bank 1  
WP#  
ACC  
X-Decoder  
Amax–A0  
STATE  
CONTROL  
&
COMMAND  
REGISTER  
RESET#  
WE#  
DQ15–DQ0  
Status  
CE#  
AVD#  
RDY  
Control  
DQ15–DQ0  
Amax–A0  
X-Decoder  
Bank 14  
DQ15–DQ0  
Bank Address  
Amax–A0  
Amax–A0  
X-Decoder  
Bank 15  
Bank Address  
DQ15–DQ0  
Notes: Amax=A23 for the WS256N.  
20  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Input/Output Descriptions  
A23-A0  
DQ15-DQ0  
CE#  
=
=
=
Address inputs for WS256N  
Data input/output  
Chip Enable input. Asynchronous relative to CLK for  
the Burst mode.  
OE#  
=
Output Enable input. Asynchronous relative to CLK  
for the Burst mode.  
WE#  
=
=
Write Enable input.  
Device Power Supply  
(1.65 – 1.95 V).  
V
CC  
V
V
V
NC  
RDY  
CLK  
=
=
=
=
=
=
Input & Output Buffer Power Supply (1.35 – 1.70 V).  
Ground  
Output Buffer Ground  
No Connect; not connected internally  
Ready output. Indicates the status of the Burst read.  
Clock input. In burst mode, after the initial word is  
output, subsequent active edges of CLK increment  
IO  
SS  
SSIO  
the internal address counter. Should be at V or V  
IL  
IH  
while in asynchronous mode  
AVD#  
=
Address Valid input. Indicates to device that the  
valid address is present on the address inputs.  
Low = for asynchronous mode, indicates valid  
address; for burst mode, causes starting address to  
be latched.  
High = device ignores address inputs  
RESET#  
WP#  
=
=
Hardware reset input. Low = device resets and  
returns to reading array data  
Hardware write protect input. At V , disables  
IL  
program and erase functions in the four outermost  
sectors. Should be at V for all other conditions.  
IH  
ACC  
=
Accelerated input. At V , accelerates  
HH  
programming; automatically places device in unlock  
bypass mode. At V , disables all program and erase  
IL  
functions. Should be at V for all other conditions.  
IH  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
21  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Logic Symbol  
Max*+1  
Amax*–A0  
16  
DQ15–DQ0  
CLK  
WP#  
ACC  
CE#  
OE#  
WE#  
RDY  
RESET#  
AVD#  
* max=23 for the WS256N.  
22  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Device Bus Operations  
This section describes the requirements and use of the device bus operations,  
which are initiated through the internal command register. The command register  
itself does not occupy any addressable memory location. The register is com-  
posed of latches that store the commands, along with the address and data  
information needed to execute the command. The contents of the register serve  
as inputs to the internal state machine. The state machine outputs dictate the  
function of the device. Table 2 lists the device bus operations, the inputs and con-  
trol levels they require, and the resulting output. The following subsections  
describe each of these operations in further detail.  
Table 2. Device Bus Operations  
CLK  
(See  
Operation  
Asynchronous Read - Addresses Latched  
CE#  
L
OE#  
L
WE#  
Addresses  
Addr In  
Addr In  
Addr In  
Addr In  
X
DQ15–0  
I/O  
RESET# Note)  
AVD#  
H
H
L
H
H
H
H
H
L
X
X
X
Asynchronous Read - Addresses Steady State  
Asynchronous Write  
L
L
I/O  
L
L
L
H
I/O  
Synchronous Write  
L
H
L
I/O  
Standby (CE#)  
H
X
X
X
X
HIGH Z  
HIGH Z  
X
X
X
X
Hardware Reset  
X
X
Burst Read Operations (Synchronous)  
Load Starting Burst Address  
L
L
X
L
H
H
Addr In  
X
X
H
H
Advance Burst to next address with  
appropriate Data presented on the Data Bus  
Burst  
Data Out  
H
Terminate current Burst read cycle  
H
X
X
X
H
H
X
X
HIGH Z  
HIGH Z  
H
L
X
X
Terminate current Burst read cycle via RESET#  
X
Terminate current Burst read cycle and start  
new Burst read cycle  
L
X
H
Addr In  
I/O  
H
Legend: L = Logic 0, H = Logic 1, X = Don’t Care.  
Note: Default active edge of CLK is the rising edge.  
Requirements for Asynchronous Read Operation (Non-  
Burst)  
To read data from the memory array, the system must first assert a valid address  
on A23–A0 for WS256N , while driving AVD# and CE# to V . WE# should remain  
IL  
at V . The rising edge of AVD# latches the address. The data will appear on  
IH  
DQ15–DQ0. Since the memory array is divided into sixteen banks, each bank re-  
mains enabled for read access until the command register contents are altered.  
Address access time (t  
) is equal to the delay from stable addresses to valid  
ACC  
output data. The chip enable access time (t ) is the delay from the stable ad-  
CE  
dresses and stable CE# to valid data at the outputs. The output enable access  
time (t ) is the delay from the falling edge of OE# to valid data at the output.  
OE  
The internal state machine is set for reading array data in asynchronous mode  
upon device power-up, or after a hardware reset. This ensures that no spurious  
alteration of the memory content occurs during the power transition.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
23  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Requirements for Synchronous (Burst) Read Operation  
The device is capable of continuous sequential burst read and linear burst read  
of a preset length. When the device first powers up, it is enabled for asynchro-  
nous read operation.  
Prior to entering burst mode, the system should determine how many wait states  
are desired for the initial word (t  
) of each burst access, what mode of burst  
IACC  
operation is desired, which edge of the clock will be the active clock edge, and  
how the RDY signal will transition with valid data. The system would then write  
the configuration register command sequence. See "Set Configuration Register  
Command Sequence" section for further details.  
Once the system has written the “Set Configuration Register” command se-  
quence, the device is enabled for synchronous reads only.  
The initial word is output t  
after the active edge of the first CLK cycle. Sub-  
IACC  
sequent words are output t  
after the active edge of each successive clock  
BACC  
cycle at which point the internal address counter is automatically incremented.  
Note that the device has a fixed internal address boundary that occurs every 128  
words, starting at address 00007Fh. No boundary crossing latency is required  
when the device operates at or below 66 MHz to reach address 000080h. When  
the device operates above 66 MHz, a boundary crossing of one additional wait  
state is required. The timing diagram can be found in Figure 28.  
When the starting burst address is not divisible by four, additional waits are re-  
quired. For example, if the starting burst address is divisible by four A1:0 = 00,  
no additional wait state is required, but if the starting burst address is at address  
A1:0 = 01, 10, or 11, one, two or three wait states are required, respectively,  
until data DQ4 is read. The RDY output indicates this condition to the system by  
deasserting (see Table 3 and Table 13).  
Table 3. Address Dependent Additional Latency  
Initial  
Address  
A[10]  
Cycle  
X
X+1  
DQ1  
DQ2  
X+2  
X+3  
X+4  
DQ4  
DQ4  
DQ4  
DQ4  
X+5  
DQ5  
DQ5  
DQ5  
DQ5  
X+6  
DQ6  
DQ6  
DQ6  
DQ6  
00  
01  
10  
11  
DQ0  
DQ1  
DQ2  
DQ2  
DQ3  
DQ3  
--  
--  
--  
DQ3  
--  
--  
DQ  
3
--  
Continuous Burst  
The device will continue to output sequential burst data, wrapping around to ad-  
dress 000000h after it reaches the highest addressable memory location, until  
the system drives CE# high, RESET# low, or AVD# low in conjunction with a new  
address. See Table 2.  
If the host system crosses a bank boundary while reading in burst mode, and the  
subsequent bank is not programming or erasing, a one-cycle latency is required  
as described above if the device is operating above 66 MHz. If the device is op-  
erating at or below 66 MHz, no boundary crossing latency is required. If the host  
system crosses the bank boundary while the subsequent bank is programming or  
erasing, the device will provide read status information. The clock will be ignored.  
After the host has completed status reads, or the device has completed the pro-  
gram or erase operation, the host can restart a burst operation using a new  
address and AVD# pulse.  
24  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
8-, 16-, and 32-Word Linear Burst with Wrap Around  
The remaining three burst read modes are of the linear wrap around design, in  
which a fixed number of words are read from consecutive addresses. In each of  
these modes, the burst addresses read are determined by the group within which  
the starting address falls. The groups are sized according to the number of words  
read in a single burst sequence for a given mode (see Table 4.)  
Table 4. Burst Address Groups  
Mode  
Group Size  
8 words  
Group Address Ranges  
0-7h, 8-Fh, 10-17h,...  
0-Fh, 10-1Fh, 20-2Fh,...  
00-1Fh, 20-3Fh, 40-5Fh,...  
8-word  
16-word  
32-word  
16 words  
32 words  
For example, if the starting address in the 8-word mode is 39h, the address range  
to be read would be 38-3Fh, and the burst sequence would be 39-3A-3B-3C-3D-  
3E-3F-38h if wrap around is enabled. The burst sequence begins with the starting  
address written to the device, but wraps back to the first address in the selected  
group. In a similar fashion, the 16-word and 32-word Linear Wrap modes begin  
their burst sequence on the starting address written to the device, and then wrap  
back to the first address in the selected address group. Note that in these three  
burst read modes the address pointer does not cross the boundary that  
occurs every 128 words; thus, no wait states are inserted (except during  
the initial access). (See Figure 15)  
8-, 16-, and 32-Word Linear Burst without Wrap Around  
If wrap around is not enabled, 8-word, 16-word, or 32-word burst will execute  
linearly up to the maximum memory address of the selected number of words.  
The burst will stop after 8, 16, or 32 addresses and will not wrap around to the  
first address of the selected group. For example: if the starting address in the 8-  
word mode is 39h, the address range to be read would be 39-40h, and the burst  
sequence would be 39-3A-3B-3C-3D-3E-3F-40 if wrap around is not enabled. The  
next address to be read will require a new address and AVD# pulse.  
The RDY pin indicates when data is valid on the bus.  
Configuration Register  
The device uses a configuration register to set the various burst parameters:  
number of wait states, burst read mode, active clock edge, RDY configuration,  
and synchronous mode active. For more information, see Table 16.  
Handshaking  
The device is equipped with a handshaking feature that allows the host system  
to simply monitor the RDY signal from the device to determine when the burst  
data is ready to be read. The host system should use the programmable wait  
state configuration to set the number of wait states for optimal burst mode oper-  
ation. The initial word of burst data is indicated by the rising edge of RDY after  
OE# goes low.  
For optimal burst mode performance, the host system must set the appropriate  
number of wait states in the flash device depending on clock frequency. See the  
"Set Configuration Register Command Sequence" section and the "Requirements  
for Synchronous (Burst) Read Operation" section for more information.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
25  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Simultaneous Read/Write Operations with Zero Latency  
This device is capable of reading data from one bank of memory while program-  
ming or erasing in another bank of memory. An erase operation may also be  
suspended to read from or program to another location within the same bank  
(except the sector being erased). Figure 31 shows how read and write cycles may  
be initiated for simultaneous operation with zero latency. Refer to the DC Char-  
acteristics table for read-while-program and read-while-erase current  
specifications.  
Writing Commands/Command Sequences  
The device has the capability of performing an asynchronous or synchronous  
write operation. While the device is configured in Asynchronous read it is able to  
perform Asynchronous write operations only. CLK is ignored when the device is  
configured in the Asynchronous mode. When in the Synchronous read mode con-  
figuration, the device is able to perform both Asynchronous and Synchronous  
write operations. CLK and AVD# induced address latches are supported in the  
Synchronous programming mode. During a synchronous write operation, to write  
a command or command sequence (which includes programming data to the de-  
vice and erasing sectors of memory), the system must drive AVD# and CE# to  
V , and OE# to V when providing an address to the device, and drive WE# and  
IL  
IH  
CE# to V , and OE# to V when writing commands or data. During an asyn-  
IL  
IH  
chronous write operation, the system must drive CE# and WE# to V and OE#  
IL  
to V when providing an address, command, and data. Addresses are latched  
IH  
on the last falling edge of WE# or CE#, while data is latched on the 1st rising  
edge of WE# or CE# (see Table 16).  
An erase operation can erase one sector, multiple sectors, or the entire device.  
Table 12 indicates the address space that each sector occupies. The device ad-  
dress space is divided into sixteen banks: Banks 1 through 14 contain only 64  
Kword sectors, while Banks 0 and 15 contain both 16 Kword boot sectors in ad-  
dition to 64 Kword sectors. A “bank address” is the set of address bits required  
to uniquely select a bank. Similarly, a sector address” is the address bits re-  
quired to uniquely select a sector.  
I
in “DC Characteristics” represents the active current specification for the  
CC2  
write mode. “AC Characteristics—Synchronous” and “AC Characteristics—Asyn-  
chronous” contain timing specification tables and timing diagrams for write  
operations.  
Unlock Bypass Mode  
The device features an Unlock Bypass mode to facilitate faster programming.  
Once the device enters the Unlock Bypass mode, only two write cycles are re-  
quired to program a set of words, instead of four. See the "Unlock Bypass  
Command Sequence" section for more details.  
Accelerated Program/Erase Operations  
The device offers accelerated program and accelerated chiperase operations  
through the ACC function. ACC is intended to allow faster manufacturing  
throughput at the factory and not to be used in system operations.  
If the system asserts V  
on this input, the device automatically enters the  
HH  
aforementioned Unlock Bypass mode and uses the higher voltage on the input to  
reduce the time required for program and erase operations. The system can then  
use the Write Buffer Load command sequence provided by the Unlock Bypass  
mode. Note that if a “Write-to-Buffer-Abort Reset” is required while in Unlock By-  
26  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
pass mode, the full 3-cycle RESET command sequence must be used to  
reset the device. Removing V  
from the ACC input, upon completion of the  
HH  
embedded program or erase operation, returns the device to normal operation.  
Note that sectors must be unlocked prior to raising ACC to V . Note that the ACC  
HH  
pin must not be at V  
for operations other than accelerated programming and  
HH  
accelerated chip erase, or device damage may result. In addition, the ACC pin  
must not be left floating or unconnected; inconsistent behavior of the device may  
result.  
When at V , ACC locks all sectors. ACC should be at V for all other conditions.  
IL  
IH  
Write Buffer Programming Operation  
Write Buffer Programming allows the system to write a maximum of 32 words  
in one programming operation. This results in a faster effective word program-  
ming time than the standard “word” programming algorithms. The Write Buffer  
Programming command sequence is initiated by first writing two unlock cycles.  
This is followed by a third write cycle containing the Write Buffer Load command  
written at the Sector Address in which programming will occur. At this point, the  
system writes the number of “word locations minus 1” that will be loaded into  
the page buffer at the Sector Address in which programming will occur. This tells  
the device how many write buffer addresses will be loaded with data and there-  
fore when to expect the “Program Buffer to Flash” confirm command. The number  
of locations to program cannot exceed the size of the write buffer or the operation  
will abort. (NOTE: the size of the write buffer is dependent upon which data are  
being loaded. Also note that the number loaded = the number of locations to pro-  
gram minus 1. For example, if the system will program 6 address locations, then  
05h should be written to the device.)  
The system then writes the starting address/data combination. This starting ad-  
dress is the first address/data pair to be programmed, and selects the “write-  
buffer-page” address. All subsequent address/data pairs must fall within the “se-  
lected-write-buffer-page.  
The “write-buffer-page” is selected by using the addresses A  
is A23 for WS256N.  
- A5 where A  
MAX  
MAX  
The “write-buffer-page” addresses must be the same for all address/data  
pairs loaded into the write buffer. (This means Write Buffer Programming  
cannot be performed across multiple “write-buffer-pages. This also means that  
Write Buffer Programming cannot be performed across multiple sectors. If the  
system attempts to load programming data outside of the selected “write-buffer-  
page, the operation will ABORT.)  
After writing the Starting Address/Data pair, the system then writes the remain-  
ing address/data pairs into the write buffer. Write buffer locations may be loaded  
in any order.  
Note that if a Write Buffer address location is loaded multiple times, the “address/  
data pair” counter will be decremented for every data load operation. Also,  
the last data loaded at a location before the “Program Buffer to Flash” confirm  
command will be programmed into the device. It is the software’s responsibility  
to comprehend ramifications of loading a write-buffer location more than once.  
The counter decrements for each data load operation, NOT for each unique  
write-buffer-address location.  
Once the specified number of write buffer locations have been loaded, the system  
must then write the “Program Buffer to Flash” command at the Sector Address.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
27  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Any other address/data write combinations will abort the Write Buffer Program-  
ming operation. The device will then “go busy.” The Data Bar polling techniques  
should be used while monitoring the last address location loaded into the  
write buffer. This eliminates the need to store an address in memory because  
the system can load the last address location, issue the program confirm com-  
mand at the last loaded address location, and then data bar poll at that same  
address. DQ7, DQ6, DQ5, DQ2, and DQ1 should be monitored to determine the  
device status during Write Buffer Programming.  
The write-buffer “embedded” programming operation can be suspended using  
the standard suspend/resume commands. Upon successful completion of the  
Write Buffer Programming operation, the device will return to READ mode.  
The Write Buffer Programming Sequence is ABORTED under any of the following  
conditions:  
„
„
„
Load a value that is greater than the page buffer size during the “Number of  
Locations to Program” step.  
Write to an address in a sector different than the one specified during the  
“Write-Buffer-Load” command.  
Write an Address/Data pair to a different write-buffer-page than the one se-  
lected by the “Starting Address” during the “write buffer data loading” stage  
of the operation.  
„
Write data other than the “Confirm Command” after the specified number of  
“data load” cycles.  
The ABORT condition is indicated by DQ1 = 1, DQ7 = DATA# (for the “last ad-  
dress location loaded”), DQ6 = TOGGLE, DQ5 = 0. This indicates that the Write  
Buffer Programming Operation was ABORTED. A “Write-to-Buffer-Abort reset”  
command sequence is required when using the Write-Buffer-Programming fea-  
tures in Unlock Bypass mode. Note that the SecSITM sector, autoselect, and CFI  
functions are unavailable when a program operation is in progress.  
Write buffer programming is allowed in any sequence of memory (or address) lo-  
cations. These flash devices are capable of handling multiple write buffer  
programming operations on the same write buffer address range without inter-  
vening erases. However, programming the same word address multiple times  
without intervening erases requires a modified programming method. Please con-  
tact your local SpansionTM representative for details.  
Use of the write buffer is strongly recommended for programming when multiple  
words are to be programmed. Write buffer programming is approximately eight  
times faster than programming one word at a time.  
Autoselect Mode  
The autoselect mode provides manufacturer and device identification, and sector  
protection verification, through identifier codes output from the internal register  
(separate from the memory array) on DQ15–DQ0. This mode is primarily in-  
tended for programming equipment to automatically match a device to be  
programmed with its corresponding programming algorithm. The autoselect  
codes can also be accessed in-system.  
When verifying sector protection, the sector address must appear on the appro-  
priate highest order address bits (see Table 12). The remaining address bits are  
don’t care. When all necessary bits have been set as required, the programming  
equipment may then read the corresponding identifier code on DQ15–DQ0. The  
autoselect codes can also be accessed in-system through the command register.  
The command sequence is illustrated in the "Command Definition Summary" sec-  
28  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
tion. Note that if a Bank Address (BA) on the four uppermost address bits is  
asserted during the third write cycle of the autoselect command, the host system  
can read autoselect data from that bank and then immediately read array data  
from the other bank, without exiting the autoselect mode.  
To access the autoselect codes, the host system must issue the autoselect com-  
mand via the command register, as shown in the "Command Definition Summary"  
section. Refer to the "Autoselect Command Sequence" section for more  
information.  
Advanced Sector Protection and Unprotection  
This advanced security feature provides an additional level of protection to all  
sectors against inadvertant program or erase operations.  
The advanced sector protection feature disables both programming and erase op-  
erations in a sector while the advanced sector unprotection feature re-enables  
both program and erase operations in previously protected sectors. Sector pro-  
tection/unprotection can be implemented using either or both of the two methods  
„
„
Hardware method  
Software method  
Persistent/Password Sector Protection is achieved by using the software method  
while the sector protection with WP# pin is achieved by using the hardware  
method.  
All parts default to operate in the Persistent Sector Protection mode. The cus-  
tomer must then choose if the Persistent or Password Protection method is most  
desirable. There are two one-time programmable non-volatile bits that define  
which sector protection method will be used.  
„
„
Persistent Mode Lock Bit  
Password Mode Lock Bit  
If the customer decides to continue using the Persistent Sector Protection  
method, they must set the Persistent Mode Lock Bit. This will permanently set  
the part to operate using only Persistent Sector Protection. However, if the cus-  
tomer decides to use the Password Sector Protection method, they must set the  
Password Mode Lock Bit. This will permanently set the part to operate using  
only Password Sector Protection.  
It is important to remember that setting either the Persistent Mode Lock Bit  
or the Password Mode Lock Bit permanently selects the protection mode. It is  
not possible to switch between the two methods once a locking bit has been set.  
It is important that one mode is explicitly selected when the device is  
first programmed, rather than relying on the default mode alone. If both  
are selected to be set at the same time, the operation will abort. This is  
done so that it is not possible for a system program or virus to later set the Pass-  
word Mode Locking Bit, which would cause an unexpected shift from the default  
Persistent Sector Protection Mode into the Password Sector Protection Mode.  
The device is shipped with all sectors unprotected. Optional SpansionTM program-  
ming services enable programming and protecting sectors at the factory prior to  
shipping the device. Contact your local sales office for more details.  
Persistent Mode Lock Bit  
A Persistent Mode Lock Bit exists to guarantee that the device remain in software  
sector protection. Once programmed (set to “0”), the Persistent Mode Lock Bit  
prevents programming of the Password Mode Lock Bit. This allows protection  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
29  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
from potential hackers locking the device by placing the device in password sec-  
tor protection mode and then changing the password accordingly.  
Password Mode Lock Bit  
In order to select the Password Sector Protection scheme, the customer must first  
program the password. Spansion LLC recommends that the password be some-  
how correlated to the unique Electronic Serial Number (ESN) of the particular  
flash device. Each ESN is different for every flash device; therefore each pass-  
word should be different for every flash device. While programming in the  
password region, the customer may perform Password Verify operations.  
Once the desired password is programmed in, the customer must then set the  
Password Mode Locking Bit. This operation achieves two objectives:  
1.It permanently sets the device to operate using the Password Sector Protection  
Mode. It is not possible to reverse this function.  
2.It also disables all further commands to the password region. All program and  
read operations are ignored.  
Both of these objectives are important, and if not carefully considered, may lead  
to unrecoverable errors. The user must be sure that the Password Sector Protec-  
tion method is desired when setting the Password Mode Locking Bit. More  
importantly, the user must be sure that the password is correct when the Pass-  
word Mode Locking Bit is set. Due to the fact that read operations are disabled,  
there is no means to verify what the password is after it is set. If the password  
is lost after setting the Password Mode Lock Bit, there will be no way to clear the  
PPB Lock Bit.  
The Password Mode Lock Bit, once set, prevents reading the 64-bit password on  
the DQ bus and further password programming. The Password Mode Lock Bit  
is not erasable. Once the Password Mode Lock Bit is programmed, the Persistent  
Mode Lock Bit is disabled from programming, guaranteeing that no changes to  
the protection scheme are allowed.  
Sector Protection  
The device features several levels of sector protection, which can disable both the  
program and erase operations in certain sectors.  
„
„
Persistent Sector Protection: A software enabled command sector protection  
method that replaces the old 12 V controlled protection method.  
Password Sector Protection: A highly sophisticated software enabled protec-  
tion method that requires a password before changes to certain sectors or  
sector groups are permitted  
„
WP# Hardware Protection: A write protect pin (WP#) can prevent program or  
erase operations in the outermost sectors.The WP# Hardware Protection fea-  
ture is always available, independent of the software managed protection  
method chosen.  
Persistent Sector Protection  
The Persistent Sector Protection method replaces the old 12 V controlled protec-  
tion method while at the same time enhancing flexibility by providing three  
different sector protection states:  
„
„
Persistently Locked—A sector is protected and cannot be changed.  
Dynamically Locked—The sector is protected and can be changed by a simple  
command  
30  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
„
Unlocked—The sector is unprotected and can be changed by a simple com-  
mand  
In order to achieve these states, three types of “bits” namely Persistent Protec-  
tion Bit (PPB), Dynamic Protecton Bit (DYB), and Persistent Protection Bit Lock  
(PPB Lock) are used to achieve the desired sector protection scheme  
Persistent Protection Bit (PPB)  
PPB is used to as an advanced security feature to protect individual sectors from  
being programmed or erased thereby providing additional level of protection.  
Every sector is assigned a Persistent Protection Bit.  
Each PPB is individually programmed through the PPB Program Command.  
However all PPBs are erased in parallel through the All PPB Erase Command.  
Prior to erasing, these bits dont have to be preprogrammed. The Embedded Erase  
algorithm automatically preprograms and verifies prior to an electrical erase. The  
system is not required to provide any controls or timings during these operations.  
The PPBs retain their state across power cycles because they are Non-Volatile.  
The PPBs have the same endurance as the flash memory.  
Persistent Protection Bit Lock (PPB Lock Bit) in Persistent Sector  
Protection Mode  
PPB Lock Bit is a global volatile bit and provides an additional level of protection  
to the sectors. When programmed (set to “0”), all the PPBs are locked and  
hence none of them can be changed. When erased (cleared to “1”), the PPBs  
are changeable. There is only one PPB Lock Bit in every device. Only a hardware  
reset or a power-up clears the PPB Lock Bit. It is to be noted that there is no soft-  
ware solution, ie. command sequence to unlock the PPB Lock Bit.  
Once all PPBs are set (programmed to “0”) to the desired settings, the PPB Lock  
Bit may be set (programmed to “0”). The PPB Lock Bit is set by issuing the PPB  
Lock Bit Set Command. Programming or setting the PPB Lock Bit disables pro-  
gram and erase commands to all the PPBs. In effect, the PPB Lock Bit locks the  
PPBs into their current state. The only way to clear the PPB Lock Bit is to go  
through a hardward or powerup reset. System boot code can determine if any  
changes to the PPB are needed e.g. to allow new system code to be downloaded.  
If no changes are needed then the boot code can disable the PPB Lock Bit to pre-  
vent any further changes to the PPBs during system operation.  
Dynamic Protection Bit (DYB)  
DYB is another security feature used to protect individual sectors from being pro-  
grammed or erased inadvertantly. It is a volatile protection bit and is assigned to  
each sector. Each DYB can be individually modified through the DYB Set Com-  
mand or the DYB Clear Command.  
The Protection Status for a particular sector is determined by the status of the  
PPB and the DYB relative to that sector. For the sectors that have the PPBs cleared  
(erased to “1”), the DYBs control whether or not the sector is protected or unpro-  
tected. By issuing the DYB Set or Clear command sequences, the DYBs will be set  
(programmed to “0”) or cleared (erased to “1”), thus placing each sector in the  
protected or unprotected state respectively. These states are the so-called Dy-  
namic Locked or Unlocked states due to the fact that they can switch back and  
forth between the protected and unprotected states. This feature allows software  
to easily protect sectors against inadvertent changes yet does not prevent the  
easy removal of protection when changes are needed. The DYBs maybe set (pro-  
grammed to “0”) or cleared (erased to “1”) as often as needed.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
31  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
When the parts are first shipped, the PPBs are cleared (erased to “1”) and upon  
power up or reset, the DYBs are set or cleared depending upon the ordering op-  
tion chosen. If the option to clear the DYBs after power up is chosen, (erased to  
“1”), then the sectors may be modified depending upon the PPB state of that sec-  
tor. (See Table 5) If the option to set the DYBs after power up is chosen  
(programmed to “0”), then the sectors would be in the protected state. The PPB  
Lock Bit defaults to the cleared state (erased to “1”) after power up and the PPBs  
retain their previous state as they are non-volatile. The default DYB state is  
cleared (erased to “1”) with the sectors in the unprotected state.  
It is possible to have sectors that have been persistently locked, and sectors that  
are left in the dynamic state. The sectors in the dynamic state are all unprotected.  
If there is a need to protect some of them, a simple DYB Set command sequence  
is all that is necessary. The DYB Set or Clear command for the dynamic sectors  
signify protected or unprotected state of the sectors respectively. However, if  
there is a need to change the status of the persistently locked sectors, a few more  
steps are required. First, the PPB Lock Bit must be cleared by either putting the  
device through a power-cycle, or hardware reset. The PPBs can then be changed  
to reflect the desired settings. Setting the PPB Lock Bit once again will lock the  
PPBs, and the device operates normally again.  
Note: to achieve the best protection, it’s recommended to execute the PPB Lock  
Bit Set command early in the boot code, and protect the boot code by holding  
WP# = V . Note that the PPB and DYB bits have the same function when ACC =  
IL  
VHH as they do when ACC = V  
.
IH  
Table 5. Sector Protection Schemes  
DYB  
1
PPB  
1
PPB Lock  
Sector State  
1
1
1
Sector Unprotected  
0
1
Sector Protected through DYB  
Sector Protected through PPB  
1
0
Sector Protected through PPB  
and DYB  
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Sector Unprotected  
Sector Protected through DYB  
Sector Protected through PPB  
Sector Protected through PPB  
and DYB  
0
0
0
Table 5 contains all possible combinations of the DYB, PPB, and PPB Lock relating  
to the status of the sector.  
In summary, if the PPB is set (programmed to “0”), and the PPB Lock is set (pro-  
grammed to “0”), the sector is protected and the protection can not be removed  
until the next power cycle clears (erase to “1”) the PPB Lock Bit. Once the PPB  
Lock Bit is cleared (erased to “1”), the sector can be persistently locked or un-  
locked. Likewise, if both PPB Lock Bit or PPB is cleared (erased to “1”) the sector  
can then be dynamically locked or unlocked. The DYB then controls whether or  
not the sector is protected or unprotected.  
If the user attempts to program or erase a protected sector, the device ignores  
the command and returns to read mode. A program or erase command to a pro-  
32  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
tected sector enables status polling and returns to read mode without having  
modified the contents of the protected sector.  
The programming of the DYB, PPB, and PPB Lock for a given sector can be verified  
by writing individual status read commands DYB Status, PPB Status, and PPB  
Lock Status to the device.  
Password Sector Protection  
The Password Sector Protection Mode method allows an even higher level of se-  
curity than the Persistent Sector Protection Mode. There are two main differences  
between the Persistent Sector Protection Mode and the Password Sector Protec-  
tion Mode:  
„
When the device is first powered up, or comes out of a reset cycle, the PPB  
Lock Bit is set to the locked state, rather than cleared to the unlocked  
state.  
„
The only means to clear the PPB Lock Bit is by writing a unique 64-bit Pass-  
word to the device.  
The Password Sector Protection method is otherwise identical to the Persistent  
Sector Protection method.  
A 64-bit password is the only additional tool utilized in this method.  
The password is stored in a one-time programmable (OTP) region of the flash  
memory. Once the Password Mode Lock Bit is set, the password is permanently  
set with no means to read, program, or erase it. The password is used to clear  
the PPB Lock Bit. The Password Unlock command must be written to the flash,  
along with a password. The flash device internally compares the given password  
with the pre-programmed password. If they match, the PPB Lock Bit is cleared,  
and the PPBs can be altered. If they do not match, the flash device does nothing.  
There is a built-in 1 µs delay for each “password check.This delay is intended to  
thwart any efforts to run a program that tries all possible combinations in order  
to crack the password.  
64-bit Password  
The 64-bit Password is located in its own memory space and is accessible through  
the use of the Password Program and Verify commands. The password function  
works in conjunction with the Password Mode Locking Bit, which when set, pre-  
vents the Password Verify command from reading the contents of the password  
on the pins of the device.  
Persistent Protection Bit Lock (PPB Lock Bit) in Password Sector  
Protection Mode  
The Persistent Protection Bit Lock (PPB Lock Bit) is a volatile bit that reflects the  
state of the Password Mode Lock Bit after power-up reset. If the Password Mode  
Lock Bit is also set, after a hardware reset (RESET# asserted) or a power-up re-  
set, the ONLY means for clearing the PPB Lock Bit in Password Protection Mode is  
to issue the Password Unlock command. Successful execution of the Password  
Unlock command to enter the entire password clears the PPB Lock Bit, allowing  
for sector PPBs modifications. Asserting RESET# or taking the device through a  
power-on reset, resets the PPB Lock Bit to a “1.  
If the Password Mode Lock Bit is not set (device is operating in the default Per-  
sistent Protection Mode). The Password Unlock command is ignored in Persistent  
Sector Protection Mode.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
33  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Lock Register  
The Lock Register consists of 4 bits. The Customer SecSi Sector Protection Bit is  
DQ0, Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit is DQ1, Password Protection Mode Lock  
Bit is DQ2, and Persistent Sector Protection OTP Bit is DQ3. Each of these bits are  
non-volatile. DQ15-DQ4 are reserved and will be 1’s.  
Table 6. Lock Register  
DQ15-3  
DQ2  
DQ1  
DQ0  
Password Protection PersistentProtection  
Customer SecSi  
Sector Protection Bit  
1’s  
Mode Lock Bit Mode Lock Bit  
Hardware Data Protection Mode  
The device offers two types of data protection at the sector level:  
„
„
When WP# is at V , the four outermost sectors are locked (device specific).  
IL  
When ACC is at V , all sectors are locked.  
IL  
The write protect pin (WP#) adds a final level of hardware program and erase  
protection to the outermost boot sectors. The outermost boot sectors are the sec-  
tors containing both the lower and upper set of outermost sectors in a dual-boot-  
configured device. When this pin is low it is not possible to change the con-  
tents of these outermost sectors. These sectors generally hold system boot  
code. So, the WP# pin can prevent any changes to the boot code that could over-  
ride the choices made while setting up sector protection during system  
initialization.  
The following hardware data protection measures prevent accidental erasure or  
programming, which might otherwise be caused by spurious system level signals  
during V power-up and power-down transitions, or from system noise.  
CC  
Write Protect (WP#)  
The Write Protect feature provides a hardware method of protecting the four out-  
ermost sectors. This function is provided by the WP# pin and overrides the  
previously discussed Sector Protection/Unprotection method.  
If the system asserts V on the WP# pin, the device disables program and erase  
IL  
functions in the “outermost” boot sectors. The outermost boot sectors are the  
sectors containing both the lower and upper set of sectors in a dual-boot-config-  
ured device.  
If the system asserts V on the WP# pin, the device reverts to whether the boot  
IH  
sectors were last set to be protected or unprotected. That is, sector protection or  
unprotection for these sectors depends on whether they were last protected or  
unprotected.  
Note that the WP# pin must not be left floating or unconnected; inconsistent be-  
havior of the device may result. The WP# pin must be held stable during a  
command sequence execution.  
Low VCC Write Inhibit  
When V is less than V  
, the device does not accept any write cycles. This pro-  
CC  
LKO  
tects data during V power-up and power-down. The command register and all  
CC  
internal program/erase circuits are disabled, and the device resets to reading  
array data. Subsequent writes are ignored until V is greater than V  
. The sys-  
CC  
LKO  
tem must provide the proper signals to the control inputs to prevent unintentional  
writes when V is greater than V  
.
LKO  
CC  
34  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Write Pulse “Glitch” Protection  
Noise pulses of less than 3 ns (typical) on OE#, CE# or WE# do not initiate a write  
cycle.  
Logical Inhibit  
Write cycles are inhibited by holding any one of OE# = V , CE# = V or WE# =  
IL  
IH  
V
. To initiate a write cycle, CE# and WE# must be a logical zero while OE# is a  
IH  
logical one.  
Power-Up Write Inhibit  
If WE# = CE# = RESET# = V and OE# = V during power up, the device does  
IL  
IH  
not accept commands on the rising edge of WE#. The internal state machine is  
automatically reset to the read mode on power-up  
Standby Mode  
When the system is not reading or writing to the device, it can place the device  
in the standby mode. In this mode, current consumption is greatly reduced, and  
the outputs are placed in the high impedance state, independent of the OE#  
input.  
The device enters the CMOS standby mode when the CE# and RESET# inputs are  
both held at V ± 0.2 V. The device requires standard access time (t ) for read  
CC  
CE  
access, before it is ready to read data.  
If the device is deselected during erasure or programming, the device draws ac-  
tive current until the operation is completed.  
I
in “DC Characteristics” represents the standby current specification.  
CC3  
Automatic Sleep Mode  
The automatic sleep mode minimizes Flash device energy consumption. While in  
asynchronous mode, the device automatically enables this mode when addresses  
remain stable for t  
+ 20 ns. The automatic sleep mode is independent of the  
ACC  
CE#, WE#, and OE# control signals. Standard address access timings provide  
new data when addresses are changed. While in sleep mode, output data is  
latched and always available to the system. While in synchronous mode, the au-  
tomatic sleep mode is disabled. Note that a new burst operation is required to  
provide new data.  
I
in “DC Characteristics” represents the automatic sleep mode current  
CC6  
specification.  
RESET#: Hardware Reset Input  
The RESET# input provides a hardware method of resetting the device to reading  
array data. When RESET# is driven low for at least a period of t , the device im-  
RP  
mediately terminates any operation in progress, tristates all outputs, resets the  
configuration register, and ignores all read/write commands for the duration of  
the RESET# pulse. The device also resets the internal state machine to reading  
array data. The operation that was interrupted should be reinitiated once the de-  
vice is ready to accept another command sequence, to ensure data integrity.  
Current is reduced for the duration of the RESET# pulse. When RESET# is held  
at V ± 0.2 V, the device draws CMOS standby current (I  
). If RESET# is held  
SS  
CC4  
at V but not within V ± 0.2 V, the standby current will be greater.  
IL  
SS  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
35  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
RESET# may be tied to the system reset circuitry. A system reset would thus also  
reset the Flash memory, enabling the system to read the boot-up firmware from  
the Flash memory.  
If RESET# is asserted during a program or erase operation, the device requires  
a time of t +t (during Embedded Algorithms) before the device is ready to  
RP  
RP  
read data again. If RESET# is asserted when a program or erase operation is not  
executing, the reset operation is completed within a time of t (not during Em-  
RP  
bedded Algorithms). The system can read data t after RESET# returns to V  
.
RH  
IH  
Refer to the "Hardware Reset (RESET#)" section for RESET# parameters and to  
Figure 20 for the timing diagram.  
Output Disable Mode  
When the OE# input is at V , output from the device is disabled. The outputs are  
IH  
placed in the high impedance state.  
SecSi™ (Secured Silicon) Sector Flash Memory Region  
The SecSi (Secured Silicon) Sector feature provides an extra Flash memory re-  
gion that enables permanent part identification through an Electronic Serial  
Number (ESN). The SecSi Sector is 256 words in length. All reads outside of the  
256 word address range will return non-valid data. The Factory Indicator Bit  
(DQ7) is used to indicate whether or not the Factory SecSi Sector is locked when  
shipped from the factory. The Customer Indicator Bit (DQ6) is used to indicate  
whether or not the Customer SecSi Sector is locked when shipped from the fac-  
tory. The Factory SecSi bits are permanently set at the factory and cannot be  
changed, which prevents cloning of a factory locked part. This ensures the secu-  
rity of the ESN and customer code once the product is shipped to the field.  
The Factory portion of the SecSi Sector is locked when shipped and the Customer  
SecSi Sector that is either locked or is lockable. The Factory SecSi Sector is al-  
ways protected when shipped from the factory, and has the Factory Indicator Bit  
(DQ7) permanently set to a “1. The Customer SecSi Sector is typically shipped  
unprotected, allowing customers to utilize that sector in any manner they choose.  
The Customer Indicator Bit set to “0.Once the Customer SecSi Sector area is  
protected, the Customer Indicator Bit will be permanently set to “1.”  
The system accesses the SecSi Sector through a command sequence (see the  
"Enter SecSi™ Sector/Exit SecSi Sector Command Sequence" section). After the  
system has written the Enter SecSi Sector command sequence, it may read the  
SecSi Sector by using the addresses normally occupied by the memory array. This  
mode of operation continues until the system issues the Exit SecSi Sector com-  
mand sequence, or until power is removed from the device. While SecSi Sector  
access is enabled, Memory Array read access, program operations, and erase op-  
erations to all sectors other than SA0 are also available. On power-up, or  
following a hardware reset, the device reverts to sending commands to the nor-  
mal address space.  
Factory Locked: Factor SecSi Sector Programmed and Protected  
At the Factory  
In a factory sector locked device, the Factory SecSi Sector is protected when the  
device is shipped from the factory. The Factory SecSi Sector cannot be modified  
in any way. The device is pre programmed with both a random number and a se-  
cure ESN. The Factory SecSi Sector is located at addresses 000000h–00007Fh.  
The device is available pre programmed with one of the following:  
36  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
„
„
A random, secure ESN only within the Factor SecSi Sector  
Customer code within the Customer SecSi Sector through the SpansionTM pro-  
gramming service  
„
Both a random, secure ESN and customer code through the SpansionTM pro-  
gramming service.  
Table 7. SecSiTM Sector Addresses  
Sector  
Customer  
Factory  
Sector Size  
128 words  
128 words  
Address Range  
000080h-0000FFh  
000000h-00007Fh  
Customers may opt to have their code programmed by Spansion through the  
SpansionTM programming services. Spansion programs the customer’s code, with  
or without the random ESN. The devices are then shipped from Spansion’s factory  
with the Factory SecSi Sector and Customer SecSi Sector permanently locked.  
Contact your local representative for details on using SpansionTM programming  
services.  
Customer SecSi Sector  
If the security feature is not required, the Customer SecSi Sector can be treated  
as an additional Flash memory space. The Customer SecSi Sector can be read  
any number of times, but can be programmed and locked only once. Note that  
the accelerated programming (ACC) and unlock bypass functions are not avail-  
able when programming the Customer SecSi Sector, but reading in Banks 1  
through 15 is available. The Customer SecSi Sector is located at addresses  
000080h–0000FFh.  
The Customer SecSi Sector area can be protected by writing the SecSi Sector  
Protection Bit Lock command sequence.  
Once the Customer SecSi Sector is locked and verified, the system must write the  
Exit SecSi Sector Region command sequence to return to reading and writing the  
remainder of the array.  
The Customer SecSi Sector lock must be used with caution since, once locked,  
there is no procedure available for unlocking the Customer SecSi Sector area and  
none of the bits in the Customer SecSi Sector memory space can be modified in  
any way.  
SecSi Sector Protection Bit  
The Customer SecSi Sector Protection Bit prevents programming of the Customer  
SecSi Sector memory area. Once set, the Customer SecSi Sector memory area  
contents are non-modifiable.  
Common Flash Memory Interface (CFI)  
The Common Flash Interface (CFI) specification outlines device and host system  
software interrogation handshake, which allows specific vendor-specified soft-  
ware algorithms to be used for entire families of devices. Software support can  
then be device-independent, JEDEC ID-independent, and forward- and back-  
ward-compatible for the specified flash device families. Flash vendors can  
standardize their existing interfaces for long-term compatibility.  
This device enters the CFI Query mode when the system writes the CFI Query  
command, 98h, to address (BA)555h any time the device is ready to read array  
data. The system can read CFI information at the addresses given in Table 8  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
37  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
through Table 11 within that bank. All reads outside of the CFI address range,  
within the bank, will return non-valid data. Reads from other banks are allowed,  
writes are not. To terminate reading CFI data, the system must write the reset  
command.  
The system can also write the CFI query command when the device is in the au-  
toselect mode. The device enters the CFI query mode, and the system can read  
CFI data at the addresses given in Table 8 through Table 11. The system must  
write the reset command to return the device to the autoselect mode.  
For further information, please refer to the CFI Specification and CFI Publication  
100. Please contact your sales office for copies of these documents.  
Table 8. CFI Query Identification String  
Addresses  
Data  
Description  
10h  
11h  
12h  
0051h  
0052h  
0059h  
Query Unique ASCII string “QRY”  
13h  
14h  
0002h  
0000h  
Primary OEM Command Set  
Address for Primary Extended Table  
15h  
16h  
0040h  
0000h  
17h  
18h  
0000h  
0000h  
Alternate OEM Command Set (00h = none exists)  
Address for Alternate OEM Extended Table (00h = none exists)  
19h  
1Ah  
0000h  
0000h  
Table 9. System Interface String  
Addresses  
Data  
Description  
VCC Min. (write/erase)  
DQ7–DQ4: volt, DQ3–DQ0: 100 millivolt  
1Bh  
0017h  
VCC Max. (write/erase)  
DQ7–DQ4: volt, DQ3–DQ0: 100 millivolt  
1Ch  
0019h  
1Dh  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
21h  
22h  
23h  
24h  
25h  
26h  
0000h  
0000h  
0005h  
0009h  
0008h  
0000h  
0003h  
0001h  
0003h  
0000h  
VPP Min. voltage (00h = no VPP pin present)  
VPP Max. voltage (00h = no VPP pin present)  
Typical timeout per single byte/word write 2N µs (Note )  
Typical timeout for Min. size buffer write 2N µs (00h = not supported) (Note )  
Typical timeout per individual block erase 2N ms  
Typical timeout for full chip erase 2N ms (00h = not supported)  
Max. timeout for byte/word write 2N times typical (Note )  
Max. timeout for buffer write 2N times typical (Note )  
Max. timeout per individual block erase 2N times typical  
Max. timeout for full chip erase 2N times typical (00h = not supported)  
Not supported due to page programming requirement  
38  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Table 10. Device Geometry Definition  
Addresses  
Data  
Description  
27h  
0019h (WS256N)  
Device Size = 2N byte  
28h  
29h  
0001h  
0000h  
Flash Device Interface description (refer to CFI publication 100)  
2Ah  
2Bh  
0005h  
0000h  
Max. number of bytes in multi-byte write = 2N  
(00h = not supported)  
2Ch  
0003h  
Number of Erase Block Regions within device  
2Dh  
2Eh  
2Fh  
30h  
0003h  
0000h  
0080h  
0000h  
Erase Block Region 1 Information  
(refer to the CFI specification or CFI publication 100)  
31h  
00FDh (WS256N)  
32h  
33h  
34h  
0000h  
0000h  
0002h  
Erase Block Region 2 Information  
35h  
36h  
37h  
38h  
0003h  
0000h  
0080h  
0000h  
Erase Block Region 3 Information  
Erase Block Region 4 Information  
39h  
3Ah  
3Bh  
3Ch  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
Table 11. Primary Vendor-Specific Extended Query  
Addresses  
Data  
Description  
40h  
41h  
42h  
0050h  
0052h  
0049h  
Query-unique ASCII string “PRI”  
43h  
44h  
0031h  
0034h  
Major version number, ASCII  
Minor version number, ASCII  
Address Sensitive Unlock (Bits 1-0)  
0 = Required, 1 = Not Required  
45h  
0010h  
Silicon Technology (Bits 5-2) 0011 = 0.13 µm  
Erase Suspend  
46h  
47h  
48h  
49h  
4Ah  
0002h  
0001h  
0 = Not Supported, 1 = To Read Only, 2 = To Read & Write  
Sector Protect  
0 = Not Supported, X = Number of sectors in per group  
Sector Temporary Unprotect  
00 = Not Supported, 01 = Supported  
0000h  
Sector Protect/Unprotect scheme  
08 = Advanced Sector Protection  
0008h  
Simultaneous Operation  
Number of Sectors in all banks except boot bank  
00DFh (WS256N)  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
39  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Table 11. Primary Vendor-Specific Extended Query (Continued)  
Addresses  
Data  
Description  
Burst Mode Type  
00 = Not Supported, 01 = Supported  
4Bh  
0001h  
Page Mode Type  
4Ch  
4Dh  
0000h  
0085h  
00 = Not Supported, 01 = 4 Word Page, 02 = 8 Word Page, 04 = 16 Word Page  
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Minimum  
00h = Not Supported, DQ7-DQ4: Volt, DQ3-DQ0: 100 mV  
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Maximum  
4Eh  
0095h  
00h = Not Supported, DQ7-DQ4: Volt, DQ3-DQ0: 100 mV  
Top/Bottom Boot Sector Flag  
0001h = Dual Boot Device  
4Fh  
50h  
51h  
0001h  
0001h  
0001h  
Program Suspend. 00h = not supported  
Unlock Bypass  
00 = Not Supported, 01=Supported  
52h  
53h  
0007h  
0014h  
SecSi Sector (Customer OTP Area) Size 2N bytes  
Hardware Reset Low Time-out during an embedded algorithm to read mode  
Maximum 2N ns  
Hardware Reset Low Time-out not during an embedded algorithm to read mode  
Maximum 2N ns  
54h  
0014h  
55h  
56h  
57h  
58h  
59h  
5Ah  
5Bh  
5Ch  
5Dh  
5Eh  
5Fh  
60h  
61h  
62h  
63h  
64h  
65h  
66h  
67h  
0005h  
Erase Suspend Time-out Maximum 2N ns  
0005h  
Program Suspend Time-out Maximum 2N ns  
0010h  
Bank Organization: X = Number of banks  
0013h (WS256N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0013h (WS256N)  
Bank 0 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 1 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 2 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 3 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 4 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 5 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 6 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 7 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 8 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 9 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 10 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 11 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 12 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 13 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 14 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 15 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
40  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Table 12. Sector Address / Memory Address Map for the WS256N  
Bank  
Sector  
SA0  
Sector Size  
16 Kwords  
16 Kwords  
16 Kwords  
16 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
A23–A14  
(x16) Address Range  
000000h-003FFFh  
004000h-007FFFh  
008000h-00BFFFh  
00C000h-00FFFFh  
010000h-01FFFFh  
020000h-02FFFFh  
030000h-03FFFFh  
040000h-04FFFFh  
050000h-05FFFFh  
060000h-06FFFFh  
070000h-07FFFFh  
080000h-08FFFFh  
090000h-09FFFFh  
0A0000h-0AFFFFh  
0B0000h-0BFFFFh  
0C0000h-0CFFFFh  
0D0000h-0DFFFFh  
0E0000h-0EFFFFh  
0F0000h-0FFFFFh  
100000h-10FFFFh  
110000h-11FFFFh  
120000h-12FFFFh  
130000h-13FFFFh  
140000h-14FFFFh  
150000h-15FFFFh  
160000h-16FFFFh  
170000h-17FFFFh  
180000h-18FFFFh  
190000h-19FFFFh  
1A0000h-1AFFFFh  
1B0000h-1BFFFFh  
1C0000h-1CFFFFh  
1D0000h-1DFFFFh  
1E0000h-1EFFFFh  
1F0000h-1FFFFFh  
0000000000  
0000000001  
0000000010  
0000000011  
00000001XX  
00000010XX  
00000011XX  
00000100XX  
00000101XX  
00000110XX  
00000111XX  
00001000XX  
00001001XX  
00001010XX  
00001011XX  
00001100XX  
00001101XX  
00001110XX  
00001111XX  
00010000XX  
00010001XX  
00010010XX  
00010011XX  
00010100XX  
00010101XX  
00010110XX  
00010111XX  
00011000XX  
00011001XX  
00011010XX  
00011011XX  
00011100XX  
00011101XX  
00011110XX  
00011111XX  
SA1  
SA2  
SA3  
SA4  
SA5  
SA6  
SA7  
SA8  
Bank 0  
SA9  
SA10  
SA11  
SA12  
SA13  
SA14  
SA15  
SA16  
SA17  
SA18  
SA19  
SA20  
SA21  
SA22  
SA23  
SA24  
SA25  
SA26  
SA27  
SA28  
SA29  
SA30  
SA31  
SA32  
SA33  
SA34  
Bank 1  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
41  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Table 12. Sector Address / Memory Address Map for the WS256N (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
SA35  
SA36  
SA37  
SA38  
SA39  
SA40  
SA41  
SA42  
SA43  
SA44  
SA45  
SA46  
SA47  
SA48  
SA49  
SA50  
SA51  
SA52  
SA53  
SA54  
SA55  
SA56  
SA57  
SA58  
SA59  
SA60  
SA61  
SA62  
SA63  
SA64  
SA65  
SA66  
Sector Size  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
A23–A14  
(x16) Address Range  
200000h-20FFFFh  
210000h-21FFFFh  
220000h-22FFFFh  
230000h-23FFFFh  
240000h-24FFFFh  
250000h-25FFFFh  
260000h-26FFFFh  
270000h-27FFFFh  
280000h-28FFFFh  
290000h-29FFFFh  
2A0000h-2AFFFFh  
2B0000h-2BFFFFh  
2C0000h-2CFFFFh  
2D0000h-2DFFFFh  
2E0000h-2EFFFFh  
2F0000h-2FFFFFh  
300000h-30FFFFh  
310000h-31FFFFh  
320000h-32FFFFh  
330000h-33FFFFh  
340000h-34FFFFh  
350000h-35FFFFh  
360000h-36FFFFh  
370000h-37FFFFh  
380000h-38FFFFh  
390000h-39FFFFh  
3A0000h-3AFFFFh  
3B0000h-3BFFFFh  
3C0000h-3CFFFFh  
3D0000h-3DFFFFh  
3E0000h-3EFFFFh  
3F0000h-3FFFFFh  
00100000XX  
00100001XX  
00100010XX  
00100011XX  
00100100XX  
00100101XX  
00100110XX  
00100111XX  
00101000XX  
00101001XX  
00101010XX  
00101011XX  
00101100XX  
00101101XX  
00101110XX  
00101111XX  
00110000XX  
00110001XX  
00110010XX  
00110011XX  
00110100XX  
00110101XX  
00110110XX  
00110111XX  
00111000XX  
00111001XX  
00111010XX  
00111011XX  
00111100XX  
00111101XX  
00111110XX  
00111111XX  
Bank 2  
Bank 3  
42  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Table 12. Sector Address / Memory Address Map for the WS256N (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
SA67  
SA68  
SA69  
SA70  
SA71  
SA72  
SA73  
SA74  
SA75  
SA76  
SA77  
SA78  
SA79  
SA80  
SA81  
SA82  
SA83  
SA84  
SA85  
SA86  
SA87  
SA88  
SA89  
SA90  
SA91  
SA92  
SA93  
SA94  
SA95  
SA96  
SA97  
SA98  
Sector Size  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
A23–A14  
(x16) Address Range  
400000h-40FFFFh  
410000h-41FFFFh  
420000h-42FFFFh  
430000h-43FFFFh  
440000h-44FFFFh  
450000h-45FFFFh  
460000h-46FFFFh  
470000h-47FFFFh  
480000h-48FFFFh  
490000h-49FFFFh  
4A0000h-4AFFFFh  
4B0000h-4BFFFFh  
4C0000h-4CFFFFh  
4D0000h-4DFFFFh  
4E0000h-4EFFFFh  
4F0000h-4FFFFFh  
500000h-50FFFFh  
510000h-51FFFFh  
520000h-52FFFFh  
530000h-53FFFFh  
540000h-54FFFFh  
550000h-55FFFFh  
560000h-56FFFFh  
570000h-57FFFFh  
580000h-58FFFFh  
590000h-59FFFFh  
5A0000h-5AFFFFh  
5B0000h-5BFFFFh  
5C0000h-5CFFFFh  
5D0000h-5DFFFFh  
5E0000h-5EFFFFh  
5F0000h-5FFFFFh  
01000000XX  
01000001XX  
01000010XX  
01000011XX  
01000100XX  
01000101XX  
01000110XX  
01000111XX  
01001000XX  
01001001XX  
01001010XX  
01001011XX  
01001100XX  
01001101XX  
01001110XX  
01001111XX  
01010000XX  
01010001XX  
01010010XX  
01010011XX  
01010100XX  
01010101XX  
01010110XX  
01010111XX  
01011000XX  
01011001XX  
01011010XX  
01011011XX  
01011100XX  
01011101XX  
01011110XX  
01011111XX  
Bank 4  
Bank 5  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
43  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Table 12. Sector Address / Memory Address Map for the WS256N (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
SA99  
Sector Size  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
A23–A14  
(x16) Address Range  
600000h-60FFFFh  
610000h-61FFFFh  
620000h-62FFFFh  
630000h-63FFFFh  
640000h-64FFFFh  
650000h-65FFFFh  
660000h-66FFFFh  
670000h-67FFFFh  
680000h-68FFFFh  
690000h-69FFFFh  
6A0000h-6AFFFFh  
6B0000h-6BFFFFh  
6C0000h-6CFFFFh  
6D0000h-6DFFFFh  
6E0000h-6EFFFFh  
6F0000h-6FFFFFh  
700000h-70FFFFh  
710000h-71FFFFh  
720000h-72FFFFh  
730000h-73FFFFh  
740000h-74FFFFh  
750000h-75FFFFh  
760000h-76FFFFh  
770000h-77FFFFh  
780000h-78FFFFh  
790000h-79FFFFh  
7A0000h-7AFFFFh  
7B0000h-7BFFFFh  
7C0000h-7CFFFFh  
7D0000h-7DFFFFh  
7E0000h-7EFFFFh  
7F0000h-7FFFFFh  
01100000XX  
01100001XX  
01100010XX  
01100011XX  
01100100XX  
01100101XX  
01100110XX  
01100111XX  
01101000XX  
01101001XX  
01101010XX  
01101011XX  
01101100XX  
01101101XX  
01101110XX  
01101111XX  
01110000XX  
01110001XX  
01110010XX  
01110011XX  
01110100XX  
01110101XX  
01110110XX  
01110111XX  
01111000XX  
01111001XX  
01111010XX  
01111011XX  
01111100XX  
01111101XX  
01111110XX  
01111111XX  
SA100  
SA101  
SA102  
SA103  
SA104  
SA105  
SA106  
SA107  
SA108  
SA109  
SA110  
SA111  
SA112  
SA113  
SA114  
SA115  
SA116  
SA117  
SA118  
SA119  
SA120  
SA121  
SA122  
SA123  
SA124  
SA125  
SA126  
SA127  
SA128  
SA129  
SA130  
Bank 6  
Bank 7  
44  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Table 12. Sector Address / Memory Address Map for the WS256N (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
SA131  
SA132  
SA133  
SA134  
SA135  
SA136  
SA137  
SA138  
SA139  
SA140  
SA141  
SA142  
SA143  
SA144  
SA145  
SA146  
SA147  
SA148  
SA149  
SA150  
SA151  
SA152  
SA153  
SA154  
SA155  
SA156  
SA157  
SA158  
SA159  
SA160  
SA161  
SA162  
Sector Size  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
A23–A14  
(x16) Address Range  
800000h-80FFFFh  
810000h-81FFFFh  
820000h-82FFFFh  
830000h-83FFFFh  
840000h-84FFFFh  
850000h-85FFFFh  
860000h-86FFFFh  
870000h-87FFFFh  
880000h-88FFFFh  
890000h-89FFFFh  
8A0000h-8AFFFFh  
8B0000h-8BFFFFh  
8C0000h-8CFFFFh  
8D0000h-8DFFFFh  
8E0000h-8EFFFFh  
8F0000h-8FFFFFh  
900000h-90FFFFh  
910000h-91FFFFh  
920000h-92FFFFh  
930000h-93FFFFh  
940000h-94FFFFh  
950000h-95FFFFh  
960000h-96FFFFh  
970000h-97FFFFh  
980000h-98FFFFh  
990000h-99FFFFh  
9A0000h-9AFFFFh  
9B0000h-9BFFFFh  
9C0000h-9CFFFFh  
9D0000h-9DFFFFh  
9E0000h-9EFFFFh  
9F0000h-9FFFFFh  
10000000XX  
10000001XX  
10000010XX  
10000011XX  
10000100XX  
10000101XX  
10000110XX  
10000111XX  
10001000XX  
10001001XX  
10001010XX  
10001011XX  
10001100XX  
10001101XX  
10001110XX  
10001111XX  
10010000XX  
10010001XX  
10010010XX  
10010011XX  
10010100XX  
10010101XX  
10010110XX  
10010111XX  
10011000XX  
10011001XX  
10011010XX  
10011011XX  
10011100XX  
10011101XX  
10011110XX  
10011111XX  
Bank 8  
Bank 9  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
45  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Table 12. Sector Address / Memory Address Map for the WS256N (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
SA163  
SA164  
SA165  
SA166  
SA167  
SA168  
SA169  
SA170  
SA171  
SA172  
SA173  
SA174  
SA175  
SA176  
SA177  
SA178  
SA179  
SA180  
SA181  
SA182  
SA183  
SA184  
SA185  
SA186  
SA187  
SA188  
SA189  
SA190  
SA191  
SA192  
SA193  
SA194  
Sector Size  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
A23–A14  
(x16) Address Range  
A00000h-A0FFFFh  
A10000h-A1FFFFh  
A20000h-A2FFFFh  
A30000h-A3FFFFh  
A40000h-A4FFFFh  
A50000h-A5FFFFh  
A60000h-A6FFFFh  
A70000h-A7FFFFh  
A80000h-A8FFFFh  
A90000h-A9FFFFh  
AA0000h-AAFFFFh  
AB0000h-ABFFFFh  
AC0000h-ACFFFFh  
AD0000h-ADFFFFh  
AE0000h-AEFFFFh  
AF0000h-AFFFFFh  
B00000h-B0FFFFh  
B10000h-B1FFFFh  
B20000h-B2FFFFh  
B30000h-B3FFFFh  
B40000h-B4FFFFh  
B50000h-B5FFFFh  
B60000h-B6FFFFh  
B70000h-B7FFFFh  
B80000h-B8FFFFh  
B90000h-B9FFFFh  
BA0000h-BAFFFFh  
BB0000h-BBFFFFh  
BC0000h-BCFFFFh  
BD0000h-BDFFFFh  
BE0000h-BEFFFFh  
BF0000h-BFFFFFh  
10100000XX  
10100001XX  
10100010XX  
10100011XX  
10100100XX  
10100101XX  
10100110XX  
10100111XX  
10101000XX  
10101001XX  
10101010XX  
10101011XX  
10101100XX  
10101101XX  
10101110XX  
10101111XX  
10110000XX  
10110001XX  
10110010XX  
10110011XX  
10110100XX  
10110101XX  
10110110XX  
10110111XX  
10111000XX  
10111001XX  
10111010XX  
10111011XX  
10111100XX  
10111101XX  
10111110XX  
10111111XX  
Bank 10  
Bank 11  
46  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Table 12. Sector Address / Memory Address Map for the WS256N (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
SA195  
SA196  
SA197  
SA198  
SA199  
SA200  
SA201  
SA202  
SA203  
SA204  
SA205  
SA206  
SA207  
SA208  
SA209  
SA210  
SA211  
SA212  
SA213  
SA214  
SA215  
SA216  
SA217  
SA218  
SA219  
SA220  
SA221  
SA222  
SA223  
SA224  
SA225  
SA226  
Sector Size  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
A23–A14  
(x16) Address Range  
C00000h-C0FFFFh  
C10000h-C1FFFFh  
C20000h-C2FFFFh  
C30000h-C3FFFFh  
C40000h-C4FFFFh  
C50000h-C5FFFFh  
C60000h-C6FFFFh  
C70000h-C7FFFFh  
C80000h-C8FFFFh  
C90000h-C9FFFFh  
CA0000h-CAFFFFh  
CB0000h-CBFFFFh  
CC0000h-CCFFFFh  
CD0000h-CDFFFFh  
CE0000h-CEFFFFh  
CF0000h-CFFFFFh  
D00000h-D0FFFFh  
D10000h-D1FFFFh  
D20000h-D2FFFFh  
D30000h-D3FFFFh  
D40000h-D4FFFFh  
D50000h-D5FFFFh  
D60000h-D6FFFFh  
D70000h-D7FFFFh  
D80000h-D8FFFFh  
D90000h-D9FFFFh  
DA0000h-DAFFFFh  
DB0000h-DBFFFFh  
DC0000h-DCFFFFh  
DD0000h-DDFFFFh  
DE0000h-DEFFFFh  
DF0000h-DFFFFFh  
11000000XX  
11000001XX  
11000010XX  
11000011XX  
11000100XX  
11000101XX  
11000110XX  
11000111XX  
11001000XX  
11001001XX  
11001010XX  
11001011XX  
11001100XX  
11001101XX  
11001110XX  
11001111XX  
11010000XX  
11010001XX  
11010010XX  
11010011XX  
11010100XX  
11010101XX  
11010110XX  
11010111XX  
11011000XX  
11011001XX  
11011010XX  
11011011XX  
11011100XX  
11011101XX  
11011110XX  
11011111XX  
Bank 12  
Bank 13  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
47  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Table 12. Sector Address / Memory Address Map for the WS256N (Continued)  
Bank  
Sector  
SA227  
SA228  
SA229  
SA230  
SA231  
SA232  
SA233  
SA234  
SA235  
SA236  
SA237  
SA238  
SA239  
SA240  
SA241  
SA242  
SA243  
SA244  
SA245  
SA246  
SA247  
SA248  
SA249  
SA250  
SA251  
SA252  
SA253  
SA254  
SA255  
SA256  
SA257  
SA258  
SA259  
SA260  
SA261  
Sector Size  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
64 Kwords  
16 Kwords  
16 Kwords  
16 Kwords  
16 Kwords  
A23–A14  
(x16) Address Range  
E00000h-E0FFFFh  
E10000h-E1FFFFh  
E20000h-E2FFFFh  
E30000h-E3FFFFh  
E40000h-E4FFFFh  
E50000h-E5FFFFh  
E60000h-E6FFFFh  
E70000h-E7FFFFh  
E80000h-E8FFFFh  
E90000h-E9FFFFh  
EA0000h-EAFFFFh  
EB0000h-EBFFFFh  
EC0000h-ECFFFFh  
ED0000h-EDFFFFh  
EE0000h-EEFFFFh  
EF0000h-EFFFFFh  
F00000h-F0FFFFh  
F10000h-F1FFFFh  
F20000h-F2FFFFh  
F30000h-F3FFFFh  
F40000h-F4FFFFh  
F50000h-F5FFFFh  
F60000h-F6FFFFh  
F70000h-F7FFFFh  
F80000h-F8FFFFh  
F90000h-F9FFFFh  
FA0000h-FAFFFFh  
FB0000h-FBFFFFh  
FC0000h-FCFFFFh  
FD0000h-FDFFFFh  
FE0000h-FEFFFFh  
FF0000h-FF3FFFh  
FF4000h-FF7FFFh  
FF8000h-FFBFFFh  
FFC000h-FFFFFFh  
11100000XX  
11100001XX  
11100010XX  
11100011XX  
11100100XX  
11100101XX  
11100110XX  
11100111XX  
11101000XX  
11101001XX  
11101010XX  
11101011XX  
11101100XX  
11101101XX  
11101110XX  
11101111XX  
11110000XX  
11110001XX  
11110010XX  
11110011XX  
11110100XX  
11110101XX  
11110110XX  
11110111XX  
11111000XX  
11111001XX  
11111010XX  
11111011XX  
11111100XX  
11111101XX  
11111110XX  
1111111100  
1111111101  
1111111110  
1111111111  
Bank 14  
Bank 15  
48  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Command Definitions  
Writing specific address and data commands or sequences into the command  
register initiates device operations. The "Command Definition Summary" section  
defines the valid register command sequences. Writing incorrect address and  
data values or writing them in the improper sequence may place the device in an  
unknown state. The system must write the reset command to return the device  
to reading array data. Refer to “AC Characteristics—Synchronous” and “AC Char-  
acteristics—Asynchronous” for timing diagrams.  
Reading Array Data  
The device is automatically set to reading asynchronous array data after device  
power-up. No commands are required to retrieve data in asynchronous mode.  
Each bank is ready to read array data after completing an Embedded Program or  
Embedded Erase algorithm.  
After the device accepts an Erase Suspend command, the corresponding bank  
enters the erase-suspend-read mode, after which the system can read data from  
any non-erase-suspended sector within the same bank. After completing a pro-  
gramming operation in the Erase Suspend mode, the system may once again  
read array data from any non-erase-suspended sector within the same bank. See  
the "Erase Suspend/Erase Resume Commands" section for more information.  
After the device accepts a Program Suspend command, the corresponding bank  
enters the program-suspend-read mode, after which the system can read data  
from any non-program-suspended sector within the same bank. See the "Pro-  
gram Suspend/Program Resume Commands" section for more information.  
The system must issue the reset command to return a bank to the read (or erase-  
suspend-read) mode if DQ5 goes high during an active program or erase opera-  
tion, or if the bank is in the autoselect mode. See the "Reset Command" section  
for more information. If DQ1 goes high during Write Buffer Programming, the  
system must issue the Write Buffer Abort Reset command.  
See also "Requirements for Asynchronous Read Operation (Non-Burst)" section  
and "Requirements for Synchronous (Burst) Read Operation" section for more in-  
formation. The Asynchronous Read and Synchronous/Burst Read tables provide  
the read parameters, and Figure 13, Figure 14, and Figure 18 show the timings.  
Set Configuration Register Command Sequence  
The device uses a configuration register to set the various burst parameters:  
number of wait states, burst read mode, active clock edge, RDY configuration,  
and synchronous mode active (see Figure 16 for details). The configuration reg-  
ister must be set before the device will enter burst mode. On power up or reset,  
the device is set in asynchronous read mode and the configuration register is re-  
set. The configuration register is not reset after deasserting CE#.  
The configuration register is loaded with a four-cycle command sequence. The  
first two cycles are standard unlock sequences. On the third cycle, the data  
should be D0h and address bits should be 555h. During the fourth cycle, the con-  
figuration code should be entered onto the data bus with the address bus set to  
address 000h. Once the data has been programmed into the configuration regis-  
ter, a software reset command is required to set the device into the correct state.  
The device will power up or after a hardware reset with the default setting, which  
is in asynchronous mode. The register must be set before the device can enter  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
49  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
synchronous mode. The configuration register can not be changed during device  
operations (program, erase, or sector lock).  
Read Configuration Register Command Sequence  
The configuration register can be read with a four-cycle command sequence. The  
first two cycles are standard unlock sequences. On the third cycle, the data  
should be C6h and address bits should be 555h. During the fourth cycle, the con-  
figuration code should be read out of the data bus with the address bus set to  
address 000h. Once the data has been read from the configuration register, a  
software reset command is required to set the device into the correct state.  
Power-up/  
Hardware Reset  
Asynchronous Read  
Mode Only  
Set Burst Mode  
Configuration Register  
Command for  
Synchronous Mode  
(D15 = 0)  
Set Burst Mode  
Configuration Register  
Command for  
Asynchronous Mode  
(D15 = 1)  
Synchronous Read  
Mode Only  
Figure 1. Synchronous/Asynchronous State Diagram  
Read Mode Setting  
This setting allows the system to enable or disable burst mode during system op-  
erations. Configuration Bit CR15 determines this setting: “1’ for asynchronous  
mode, “0” for synchronous mode.  
Programmable Wait State Configuration  
The programmable wait state feature informs the device of the number of clock  
cycles that must elapse after AVD# is driven active before data will be available.  
This value is determined by the input frequency of the device. Configuration Bit  
CR13–CR11 determine the setting (see Table 13).  
The wait state command sequence instructs the device to set a particular number  
of clock cycles for the initial access in burst mode. The number of wait states that  
should be programmed into the device is directly related to the clock frequency.  
50  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Table 13. Programmable Wait State Settings  
CR13  
0
CR12  
0
CR11  
0
Total Initial Access Cycles  
2
0
0
1
3
0
1
0
4
5
0
1
1
1
0
0
6
1
0
1
7 (default)  
Reserved  
Reserved  
1
1
0
1
1
1
Notes:  
1. Upon power-up or hardware reset, the default setting is seven wait states.  
2. RDY will default to being active with data when the Wait State Setting is set  
to a total initial access cycle of 2.  
It is recommended that the wait state command sequence be written, even if the  
default wait state value is desired, to ensure the device is set as expected. A  
hardware reset will set the wait state to the default setting.  
Programmable Wait State  
If the device is equipped with the handshaking option, the host system should set  
CR13-CR11 to 010 for a clock frequency of 54 MHz or to 011 for a clock fre-  
quency of 66 MHz for the system/device to execute at maximum speed.  
Table 14 describes the typical number of clock cycles (wait states) for various  
conditions.  
Boundary Crossing Latency  
If the device is operating above 66 MHz, an additional wait state must be inserted  
to account for boundary crossing latency. This is done by setting CR14 to a ‘1’  
(default). If the device is operating at or below 66 MHz, the additional wait state  
for boundary crossing is not needed. Therefore the CR14 can be changed to a ‘0’  
to remove boundary crossing latency.  
Set Internal Clock Frequency  
The device switches at the full frequency of the external clock up to 66 MHz when  
CR9 is set to a ‘1’ (default).  
Table 14. Wait States for Handshaking  
Typical No. of Clock Cycles after AVD# Low  
54  
66  
Conditions at Address  
Initial address (VIO = 1.8 V)  
MHz  
MHz  
4
5
Handshaking  
For optimal burst mode performance, the host system must set the appropriate  
number of wait states in the flash device depending on the clock frequency.  
The autoselect function allows the host system to determine whether the flash  
device is enabled for handshaking. See the "Autoselect Command Sequence" sec-  
tion for more information.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
51  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Burst Sequence  
Only sequential burst is allowed in the device. CR7 defaults to a ‘1’ and must al-  
ways be set to a ‘1.  
Burst Length Configuration  
The device supports four different read modes: continuous mode, and 8, 16, and  
32 word linear with or without wrap around modes. A continuous sequence (de-  
fault) begins at the starting address and advances the address pointer until the  
burst operation is complete. If the highest address in the device is reached during  
the continuous burst read mode, the address pointer wraps around to the lowest  
address.  
For example, an eight-word linear read with wrap around begins on the starting  
address written to the device and then advances to the next 8 word boundary.  
The address pointer then returns to the 1st word after the previous eight word  
boundary, wrapping through the starting location. The sixteen- and thirty-two lin-  
ear wrap around modes operate in a fashion similar to the eight-word mode.  
Table 15 shows the CR2-CR0 and settings for the four read modes.  
Table 15. Burst Length Configuration  
Address Bits  
Burst Modes  
Continuous  
CR2  
0
CR1  
0
CR0  
0
8-word linear  
16-word linear  
32-word linear  
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
Note: Upon power-up or hardware reset the default setting is continuous.  
Burst Wrap Around  
By default, the device will perform burst wrap around with CR3 set to a ‘1.  
Changing the CR3 to a ‘0’ disables burst wrap around.  
Burst Active Clock Edge Configuration  
By default, the device will deliver data on the rising edge of the clock after the  
initial synchronous access time. Subsequent outputs will also be on the following  
rising edges, barring any delays. The device can be set so that the falling clock  
edge is active for all synchronous accesses. CR6 determines this setting; “1” for  
rising active (default), “0” for falling active.  
RDY Configuration  
By default, the device is set so that the RDY pin will output V  
whenever there  
OH  
is valid data on the outputs. The device can be set so that RDY goes active one  
data cycle before active data. CR8 determines this setting; “1” for RDY active  
(default) with data, “0” for RDY active one clock cycle before valid data. In asyn-  
chronous mode, RDY is an open-drain output.  
RDY Polarity  
By default, the RDY pin will always indicate that the device is ready to handle a  
new transaction with CR10 set to a ‘1’ when high. In this case, the RDY pin is  
active high. Changing the CR10 to a ‘0’ sets the RDY pin to be active low. In this  
52  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
case, the RDY pin will always indicate that the device is ready to handle a new  
transaction when low.  
Configuration Register  
Table 16 shows the address bits that determine the configuration register settings  
for various device functions.  
Table 16. Configuration Register  
CR BIt  
Function  
Settings (Binary)  
Set Device  
Read Mode  
0 = Synchronous Read (Burst Mode) Enabled  
1 = Asynchronous Mode (default)  
CR15  
0 = No extra boundary crossing latency  
Boundary  
Crossing  
CR14  
CR13  
1 = With extra boundary crossing latency (default)  
000 = Data is valid on the 2nd active CLK edge after addresses are latched  
001 = Data is valid on the 3rd active CLK edge after addresses are latched  
010 = Data is valid on the 4th active CLK edge after addresses are latched  
011 = Data is valid on the 5th active CLK edge after addresses are latched  
100 = Data is valid on the 6th active CLK edge after addresses are latched  
101 = Data is valid on the 7th active CLK edge after addresses are latched (default)  
110 = Reserved  
CR12  
Programmable  
Wait State  
CR11  
111 = Reserved  
0 = RDY signal is active low  
CR10  
CR9  
RDY Polarity  
1 = RDY signal is active high (default)  
Set Internal  
Clock  
Frequency  
0 = Reserved for Future Use  
1 = Internal clock switches at full frequency of the external clock (default)  
0 = RDY active one clock cycle before data  
1 = RDY active with data (default)  
CR8  
CR7  
CR6  
RDY  
0 = Reserved for Future Use  
Burst  
Sequence  
1 = Sequential Burst Order (default)  
0 = Burst starts and data is output on the falling edge of CLK  
1 = Burst starts and data is output on the rising edge of CLK (default)  
Clock  
0 = No Wrap Around Burst  
Burst Wrap  
Around  
CR3  
CR2  
1 = Wrap Around Burst (default)  
000 = Continuous (default)  
010 = 8-Word Linear Burst  
CR1  
CR0  
Burst Length  
011 = 16-Word Linear Burst  
100 = 32-Word Linear Burst  
(All other bit settings are reserved)  
Notes: Device will be in the default state upon power-up or hardware reset.  
Reset Command  
Writing the reset command resets the banks to the read or erase-suspend-read  
mode. Address bits are don’t cares for this command.  
The reset command may be written between the sequence cycles in an erase  
command sequence before erasing begins. This resets the bank to which the sys-  
tem was writing to the read mode. Once erasure begins, however, the device  
ignores reset commands until the operation is complete.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
53  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
The reset command may be written between the sequence cycles in a program  
command sequence before programming begins (prior to the third cycle). This re-  
sets the bank to which the system was writing to the read mode. If the program  
command sequence is written to a bank that is in the Erase Suspend mode, writ-  
ing the reset command returns that bank to the erase-suspend-read mode. Once  
programming begins, however, the device ignores reset commands until the op-  
eration is complete.  
The reset command may be written between the sequence cycles in an autoselect  
command sequence. Once in the autoselect mode, the reset command must be  
written to return to the read mode. If a bank entered the autoselect mode while  
in the Erase Suspend mode, writing the reset command returns that bank to the  
erase-suspend-read mode.  
If DQ5 goes high during a program or erase operation, writing the reset command  
returns the banks to the read mode (or erase-suspend-read mode if that bank  
was in Erase Suspend and program-suspend-read mode if that bank was in Pro-  
gram Suspend).  
Note: If DQ1 goes high during a Write Buffer Programming operation, the system  
must write the “Write to Buffer Abort Reset” command sequence to RESET the  
device to reading array data. The standard RESET command will not work. See  
Table 17 for details on this command sequence.  
Autoselect Command Sequence  
The autoselect command sequence allows the host system to access the manu-  
facturer and device codes, and determine whether or not a sector is protected.  
The "Command Definition Summary" section shows the address and data re-  
quirements. The autoselect command sequence may be written to an address  
within a bank that is either in the read or erase-suspend-read mode. The autose-  
lect command may not be written while the device is actively programming or  
erasing in the other bank. Autoselect does not support simultaneous operations  
nor synchronous mode.  
The autoselect command sequence is initiated by first writing two unlock cycles.  
This is followed by a third write cycle that contains the bank address and the au-  
toselect command. The bank then enters the autoselect mode. The system may  
read at any address within the same bank any number of times without initiating  
another autoselect command sequence. Read commands to other banks will re-  
turn data from the array. Writes to other banks is not allowed. The following table  
describes the address requirements for the various autoselect functions, and the  
resulting data. BA represents the bank address. The device ID is read in three  
cycles.  
Table 17. Autoselect Addresses  
Description  
Address  
Read Data  
0001h  
Manufacturer ID  
Device ID, Word 1  
(BA) + 00h  
(BA) + 01h  
227Eh  
54  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Table 17. Autoselect Addresses  
Description  
Address  
Read Data  
Device ID, Word 2  
Device ID, Word 3  
(BA) + 0Eh  
(BA) + 0Fh  
2230 (WS256N)  
2200  
DQ15 - DQ8 = 0  
DQ7 - Factory Lock Bit  
1 = Locked, 0 = Not Locked  
DQ6 -Customer Lock Bit  
1 = Locked, 0 = Not Locked  
DQ5 - Handshake Bit  
1 = Reserved,  
0 = Standard Handshake  
DQ4 & DQ3 - WP# Protection Boot Code  
00 = WP# Protects both Top Boot and  
Bottom Boot Sectors,  
01 = Reserved,  
10 = Reserved  
Indicator Bits  
(BA) + 03h  
11 = Reserved  
DQ2 = 0  
DQ1 - DYB Power up state  
(DQ1 = Lock Register DQ4)  
1 = Unlocked (user option)  
0 = Locked (default)  
DQ0 - PPB Eraseability  
(DQ0 = Lock Register DQ3)  
1 = Erase allowed  
0 = Erase disabled  
The system must write the reset command to return to the read mode (or erase-  
suspend-read mode if the bank was previously in Erase Suspend).  
Enter SecSi™ Sector/Exit SecSi Sector Command Sequence  
The SecSi Sector region provides a secured data area containing a random, eight  
word electronic serial number (ESN). The system can access the SecSi Sector re-  
gion by issuing the three-cycle Enter SecSi Sector command sequence. The  
device continues to access the SecSi Sector region until the system issues the  
four-cycle Exit SecSi Sector command sequence. The Exit SecSi Sector command  
sequence returns the device to normal operation. The SecSi Sector is not acces-  
sible when the device is executing an Embedded Program or embedded Erase  
algorithm. The "Command Definition Summary" section shows the address and  
data requirements for both command sequences.  
Word Program Command Sequence  
Programming is a four-bus-cycle operation. The program command sequence is  
initiated by writing two unlock write cycles, followed by the program set-up com-  
mand. The program address and data are written next, which in turn initiate the  
Embedded Program algorithm. The system is not required to provide further con-  
trols or timings. The device automatically provides internally generated program  
pulses and verifies the programmed cell margin.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
55  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
When the Embedded Program algorithm is complete, the device then returns to  
the read mode and addresses are no longer latched. The system can determine  
the status of the program operation by using DQ7 or DQ6. Refer to the Write Op-  
eration Status section for information on these status bits.  
Any commands written to the device during the Embedded Program Algorithm  
are ignored. Note that the SecSi Sector, autoselect, and CFI functions are  
unavailable when a program operation is in progress. Note that a hard-  
ware reset immediately terminates the program operation. The program  
command sequence should be reinitiated once the device has returned to the  
read mode, to ensure data integrity.  
Programming is allowed in any sequence and across sector boundaries. Program-  
ming to the same word address multiple times without intervening erases is  
limited. For such application requirements, please contact your local Spansion  
representative. Any word cannot be programmed from “0” back to a “1.”  
Attempting to do so may cause the device to set DQ5 = 1, or cause the DQ7 and  
DQ6 status bits to indicate the operation was successful. However, a succeeding  
read will show that the data is still “0.” Only erase operations can convert a “0”  
to a “1.”  
Write Buffer Programming Command Sequence  
Write Buffer Programming Sequence allows for faster programming compared to  
the standard Program Command Sequence. Write Buffer Programming allows the  
system to write 32 words in one programming operation. See the "Write Buffer  
Programming Operation" section for the program command sequence.  
Table 18. Write Buffer Command Sequence  
Sequence  
Unlock Command 1  
Unlock Command 2  
Write Buffer Load  
Address  
555  
Data  
00AA  
0055  
0025h  
Comment  
Not required in the Unlock Bypass mode  
Same as above  
2AA  
Starting Address  
Specify the Number of Program  
Locations  
Number of locations to program minus 1 (must be  
32 - 1 = 31)  
Starting Address  
Word Count  
All addresses must be within write-buffer-page  
boundaries, but do not have to be loaded in any  
order  
Load 1st data word  
Starting Address  
Program Data  
Write Buffer  
Location  
Load next data word  
...  
Program Data  
...  
Same as above  
Same as above  
Same as above  
...  
Write Buffer  
Location  
Load last data word  
Program Data  
This command must follow the last write buffer  
location loaded, or the operation will ABORT  
Write Buffer Program Confirm  
Device goes busy  
Sector Address  
0029h  
Status monitoring through DQ  
pins (Perform Data Bar Polling on  
the Last Loaded Address  
)
56  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Write “Write to Buffer”  
command and  
Sector Address  
Write number of addresses  
Part of “Write to Buffer”  
to program minus 1  
(WC = 31)  
Command Sequence  
and Sector Address  
Write first address/data  
Yes  
WC = 0 ?  
No  
Write to a different  
sector address  
Abort Write to  
Yes  
Buffer Operation?  
Write to buffer ABORTED.  
Must write “Write-to-buffer  
Abort Reset” command  
sequence to return  
No  
Write next address/data pair  
to read mode.  
WC = WC - 1  
Write program buffer to  
flash sector address  
Read DQ15 - DQ0 at  
Last Loaded Address  
Yes  
DQ7 = Data?  
No  
No  
No  
DQ1 = 1?  
Yes  
DQ5 = 1?  
Yes  
Read DQ15 - DQ0 with  
address = Last Loaded  
Address  
Yes  
DQ7 = Data?  
No  
FAIL or ABORT  
PASS  
Figure 2. Write Buffer Programming Operation  
Unlock Bypass Command Sequence  
The unlock bypass feature allows faster programming than the standard program  
command sequence. The unlock bypass command sequence is initiated by first  
writing two unlock cycles. This is followed by a third write cycle containing the  
unlock bypass command, 20h. The device then enters the unlock bypass mode.  
A two-cycle unlock bypass program command sequence is all that is required to  
program in this mode. The first cycle in this sequence contains the unlock bypass  
program command, A0h; the second cycle contains the program address and  
data. Additional data is programmed in the same manner. This mode dispenses  
with the initial two unlock cycles required in the standard program command se-  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
57  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
quence, resulting in faster total programming time. The host system may also  
initiate the chip erase and sector erase sequences in the unlock bypass mode. The  
erase command sequences are four cycles in length instead of six cycles. The  
"Command Definition Summary" section shows the requirements for the unlock  
bypass command sequences.  
During the unlock bypass mode, only the Read, Unlock Bypass Program, Unlock  
Bypass Sector Erase, Unlock Bypass Chip Erase, and Unlock Bypass Reset com-  
mands are valid. To exit the unlock bypass mode, the system must issue the two-  
cycle unlock bypass reset command sequence. The first cycle must contain the  
bank address and the data 90h. The second cycle need only contain the data 00h.  
The bank then returns to the read mode.  
The device offers accelerated program operations through the ACC input. When  
the system asserts V on this input, the device automatically enters the Unlock  
HH  
Bypass mode. The system may then write the two-cycle Unlock Bypass program  
command sequence. The device uses the higher voltage on the ACC input to ac-  
celerate the operation.  
Figure 3 illustrates the algorithm for the program operation. Refer to the Erase/  
Program Operations table in “AC Characteristics—Asynchronous” for parameters,  
and Figure 21 for timing diagrams.  
START  
Write Program  
Command Sequence  
Data Poll  
from System  
Embedded  
Program  
algorithm  
in progress  
Verify Data?  
No  
Yes  
No  
Increment Address  
Last Address?  
Yes  
Programming  
Completed  
Note: See the "Command Definition Summary" section for program command sequence.  
Figure 3. Program Operation  
Chip Erase Command Sequence  
Chip erase is a six bus cycle operation or, in the unlock bypass mode, a four-cycle  
operation. The chip erase command sequence is initiated by writing two unlock  
cycles, followed by a set-up command. Two additional unlock write cycles are  
then followed by the chip erase command, which in turn invokes the Embedded  
Erase algorithm. The device does not require the system to preprogram prior to  
58  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
erase. The Embedded Erase algorithm automatically preprograms and verifies the  
entire memory for an all zero data pattern prior to electrical erase. The system is  
not required to provide any controls or timings during these operations. The  
"Command Definition Summary" section shows the address and data require-  
ments for the chip erase command sequence.  
When the Embedded Erase algorithm is complete, that bank returns to the read  
mode and addresses are no longer latched. The system can determine the status  
of the erase operation by using DQ7 or DQ6/DQ2. Refer to “Write Operation Sta-  
tus” for information on these status bits.  
Any commands written during the chip erase operation are ignored. However,  
note that a hardware reset immediately terminates the erase operation. If that  
occurs, the chip erase command sequence should be reinitiated once that bank  
has returned to reading array data, to ensure data integrity.  
The host system may also initiate the chip erase command sequence while the  
device is in the unlock bypass mode. The command sequence is two cycles in  
length instead of six cycles.  
Figure 4 illustrates the algorithm for the erase operation. Refer to the "Erase/Pro-  
gram Operations @ V = 1.8 V" section for parameters and timing diagrams.  
IO  
Sector Erase Command Sequence  
Sector erase is a six bus cycle operation or, in the unlock bypass mode, a four-  
cycle operation. The sector erase command sequence is initiated by writing two  
unlock cycles, followed by a set-up command. Two additional unlock cycles are  
written, and are then followed by the address of the sector to be erased, and the  
sector erase command. The "Command Definition Summary" section shows the  
address and data requirements for the sector erase command sequence.  
The device does not require the system to preprogram prior to erase. The Em-  
bedded Erase algorithm automatically programs and verifies the entire memory  
for an all zero data pattern prior to electrical erase. The system is not required to  
provide any controls or timings during these operations.  
After the command sequence is written, a sector erase time-out of no less than  
50 µs occurs. During the time-out period, additional sector addresses and sector  
erase commands may be written. Loading the sector erase buffer may be done  
in any sequence, and the number of sectors may be from one sector to all sectors.  
The time between these additional cycles must be less than 50 µs, otherwise era-  
sure may begin. Any sector erase address and command following the exceeded  
time-out may or may not be accepted. It is recommended that processor inter-  
rupts be disabled during this time to ensure all commands are accepted. The  
interrupts can be re-enabled after the last Sector Erase command is written. Any  
command other than Sector Erase or Erase Suspend during the time-out period  
resets that bank to the read mode. The system must rewrite the command se-  
quence and any additional addresses and commands.  
The system can monitor DQ3 to determine if the sector erase timer has timed out  
(See the "DQ3: Sector Erase Timer" section.) The time-out begins from the rising  
edge of the final WE# pulse in the command sequence.  
When the Embedded Erase algorithm is complete, the bank returns to reading  
array data and addresses are no longer latched. Note that while the Embedded  
Erase operation is in progress, the system can read data from the non-erasing  
bank. The system can determine the status of the erase operation by reading  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
59  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
DQ7 or DQ6/DQ2 in the erasing bank. Refer to “Write Operation Status” for in-  
formation on these status bits.  
Once the sector erase operation has begun, only the Erase Suspend command is  
valid. All other commands are ignored. However, note that a hardware reset im-  
mediately terminates the erase operation. If that occurs, the sector erase  
command sequence should be reinitiated once that bank has returned to reading  
array data, to ensure data integrity.  
The host system may also initiate the sector erase command sequence while the  
device is in the unlock bypass mode. The command sequence is four cycles cycles  
in length instead of six cycles.  
Figure 4 illustrates the algorithm for the erase operation. Refer to the "Erase/Pro-  
gram Operations @ V = 1.8 V" section for parameters and timing diagrams.  
IO  
Erase Suspend/Erase Resume Commands  
The Erase Suspend command allows the system to interrupt a sector erase oper-  
ation and then read data from, or program data to, any sector not selected for  
erasure. The bank address is required when writing this command. This com-  
mand is valid only during the sector erase operation, including the minimum 50  
µs time-out period during the sector erase command sequence. The Erase Sus-  
pend command is ignored if written during the chip erase operation or Embedded  
Program algorithm.  
When the Erase Suspend command is written during the sector erase operation,  
the device requires a maximum of 20 µs to suspend the erase operation. How-  
ever, when the Erase Suspend command is written during the sector erase time-  
out, the device immediately terminates the time-out period and suspends the  
erase operation.  
After the erase operation has been suspended, the bank enters the erase-sus-  
pend-read mode. The system can read data from or program data to any sector  
not selected for erasure. (The device “erase suspends” all sectors selected for  
erasure.) Reading at any address within erase-suspended sectors produces sta-  
tus information on DQ7–DQ0. The system can use DQ7, or DQ6 and DQ2  
together, to determine if a sector is actively erasing or is erase-suspended. Refer  
to Table 20 for information on these status bits.  
After an erase-suspended program operation is complete, the bank returns to the  
erase-suspend-read mode. The system can determine the status of the program  
operation using the DQ7 or DQ6 status bits, just as in the standard program  
operation.  
In the erase-suspend-read mode, the system can also issue the autoselect com-  
mand sequence. Refer to the "Write Buffer Programming Operation" section and  
the "Autoselect Command Sequence" section for details.  
To resume the sector erase operation, the system must write the Erase Resume  
command. The bank address of the erase-suspended bank is required when writ-  
ing this command. Further writes of the Resume command are ignored. Another  
Erase Suspend command can be written after the chip has resumed erasing.  
60  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
START  
Write Erase  
Command Sequence  
(Notes 1, 2)  
Data Poll to Erasing  
Bank from System  
Embedded  
Erase  
algorithm  
in progress  
No  
Data = FFh?  
Yes  
Erasure Completed  
Notes:  
1. See the "Command Definition Summary" section for erase command sequence.  
2. See the section on DQ3 for information on the sector erase timer.  
Figure 4. Erase Operation  
Program Suspend/Program Resume Commands  
The Program Suspend command allows the system to interrupt an embedded  
programming operation or a “Write to Buffer” programming operation so that  
data can read from any non-suspended sector. When the Program Suspend com-  
mand is written during a programming process, the device halts the  
programming operation within 20 µs and updates the status bits. Addresses are  
“don’t-cares” when writing the Program Suspend command.  
After the programming operation has been suspended, the system can read array  
data from any non-suspended sector. The Program Suspend command may also  
be issued during a programming operation while an erase is suspended. In this  
case, data may be read from any addresses not in Erase Suspend or Program  
Suspend. If a read is needed from the SecSi Sector area, then user must use the  
proper command sequences to enter and exit this region.  
The system may also write the autoselect command sequence when the device  
is in Program Suspend mode. The device allows reading autoselect codes in the  
suspended sectors, since the codes are not stored in the memory array. When the  
device exits the autoselect mode, the device reverts to Program Suspend mode,  
and is ready for another valid operation. See “Autoselect Command Sequence”  
for more information.  
After the Program Resume command is written, the device reverts to program-  
ming. The system can determine the status of the program operation using the  
DQ7 or DQ6 status bits, just as in the standard program operation. See “Write  
Operation Status” for more information.  
The system must write the Program Resume command (address bits are “don’t  
care”) to exit the Program Suspend mode and continue the programming opera-  
tion. Further writes of the Program Resume command are ignored. Another  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
61  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Program Suspend command can be written after the device has resumed  
programming.  
Lock Register Command Set Definitions  
The Lock Register Command Set permits the user to program the SecSi Sector  
Protection Bit, Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit, or Password Protection Mode  
Lock Bit one time. The Lock Command Set also allows for the reading of the SecSi  
Sector Protection Bit, Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit, or Password Protection  
Mode Lock Bit.  
The Lock Register Command Set Entry command sequence must be issued  
prior to any of the following commands to enable proper command execution.  
„
„
„
Lock Register Program Command  
Lock Register Read Command  
Lock Register Exit Command  
Note that issuing the Lock Register Command Set Entry command disables  
reads and writes for Bank 0. Reads from other banks excluding Bank 0 are  
allowed.  
The Lock Register Command Set Exit command must be issued after the ex-  
ecution of the commands to reset the device to read mode. Otherwise the device  
will hang.  
For either the SecSi Sector to be locked, or the device to be permanently set to  
the Persistent Protection Mode or the Password Protection Mode, the sequence of  
a Lock Register Command Set Exit command, must be initiated after issuing  
the SecSi Protection Bit Program, Persistent Protection Mode Locking Bit  
Program, or the Password Protection Mode Locking Bit Program com-  
mands. Note that if the Persistent Protection Mode Locking Bit and the  
Password Protection Mode Locking Bit are programmed at the same time,  
neither will be programmed.  
Note that issuing the Lock Register Command Set Exit command re-enables  
reads and writes for Bank 0.  
Password Protection Command Set Definitions  
The Password Protection Command Set permits the user to program the 64-bit  
password, verify the programming of the 64-bit password, and then later unlock  
the device by issuing the valid 64-bit password.  
The Password Protection Command Set Entry command sequence must be  
issued prior to any of the following commands to enable proper command  
execution.  
„
„
„
Password Program Command  
Password Read Command  
Password Unlock Command  
Note that issuing the Password Protection Command Set Entry command  
disables reads and writes for Bank 0. Reads and Writes for other banks excluding  
Bank 0 are allowed.  
The Password Program Command permits programming the password that is  
used as part of the hardware protection scheme. The actual password is 64-bits  
long. There is no special addressing order required for programming the  
password.  
62  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Once the Password is written and verified, the Password Mode Locking Bit must  
be set in order to prevent verification. The Password Program Command is only  
capable of programming “0”s. Programming a “1” after a cell is programmed as  
a “0” results in a time-out by the Embedded Program Algorithm™ with the cell  
remaining as a “0. The password is all F’s when shipped from the factory. All 64-  
bit password combinations are valid as a password.  
The Password Verify Command is used to verify the Password. The Password is  
verifiable only when the Password Mode Locking Bit is not programmed. If the  
Password Mode Locking Bit is programmed and the user attempts to verify the  
Password, the device will always drive all F’s onto the DQ data bus.  
The lower two address bits (A1–A0) are valid during the Password Read, Pass-  
word Program, and Password Unlock.  
The Password Unlock command is used to clear the PPB Lock Bit so that the PPBs  
can be unlocked for modification, thereby allowing the PPBs to become accessible  
for modification. The exact password must be entered in order for the unlocking  
function to occur. This command cannot be issued any faster than 1 µs at a time  
to prevent a hacker from running through all the 64-bit combinations in an at-  
tempt to correctly match a password. If the command is issued before the 1 µs  
execution window for each portion of the unlock, the command will be ignored.  
The Password Unlock function is accomplished by writing Password Unlock com-  
mand and data to the device to perform the clearing of the PPB Lock Bit. The  
password is 64 bits long. A1 and A0 are used for matching. Writing the Password  
Unlock command does not need to be address order specific. An example se-  
quence is starting with the lower address A1–A0= 00, followed by A1–A0= 01,  
A1–A0= 10, and A1–A0= 11.  
Approximately 1 µSec is required for unlocking the device after the valid 64-bit  
password is given to the device. It is the responsibility of the microprocessor to  
keep track of the 64-bit password as it is entered with the Password Unlock com-  
mand, the order, and when to read the PPB Lock bit to confirm successful  
password unlock. In order to re-lock the device into the Password Mode, the PPB  
Lock Bit Set command can be re-issued.  
The Password Protection Command Set Exit command must be issued after  
the execution of the commands listed previously to reset the device to read  
mode. Otherwise the device will hang.  
Note that issuing the Password Protection Command Set Exit command re-  
enables reads and writes for Bank 0.  
Non-Volatile Sector Protection Command Set Definitions  
The Non-Volatile Sector Protection Command Set permits the user to program the  
Persistent Protection Bits (PPBs), erase all of the Persistent Protection Bits (PPBs),  
and read the logic state of the Persistent Protection Bits (PPBs).  
The Non-Volatile Sector Protection Command Set Entry command se-  
quence must be issued prior to any of the following commands to enable proper  
command execution.  
„
„
„
PPB Program Command  
All PPB Erase Command  
PPB Status Read Command  
Note that issuing the Non-Volatile Sector Protection Command Set Entry  
command disables reads and writes for the bank selected. Reads within that  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
63  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
bank, will return the PPB status for that sector. Writes within that bank, will set  
the PPB for that sector. Reads from other banks are allowed, writes are not al-  
lowed. All Reads must be performed using the Asynchronous mode.  
The PPB Program command is used to program, or set, a given PPB. Each PPB is  
individually programmed (but is bulk erased with the other PPBs). The specific  
sector address (A23–A14 WS256N) are written at the same time as the program  
command. If the PPB Lock Bit is set, the PPB Program command will not execute  
and the command will time-out without programming the PPB.  
The All PPB Erase command is used to erase all PPBs in bulk. There is no means  
for individually erasing a specific PPB. Unlike the PPB program, no specific sector  
address is required. However, when the PPB erase command is written, all Sector  
PPBs are erased in parallel. If the PPB Lock Bit is set the ALL PPB Erase command  
will not execute and the command will time-out without erasing the PPBs.  
The device will preprogram all PPBs prior to erasing when issuing the All PPB  
Erase command. Also note that the total number of PPB program/erase cycles has  
the same endurance as the flash memory array.  
The programming state of the PPB for a given sector can be verified by writing a  
PPB Status Read Command to the device.  
The Non-Volatile Sector Protection Command Set Exit command must be  
issued after the execution of the commands listed previously to reset the device  
to read mode.  
Note that issuing the Non-Volatile Sector Protection Command Set Exit  
command re-enables reads and writes for Bank 0.  
Global Volatile Sector Protection Freeze Command Set  
The Global Volatile Sector Protection Freeze Command Set permits the user to set  
the PPB Lock Bit and reading the logic state of the PPB Lock Bit.  
The Volatile Sector Protection Freeze Command Set Entry command se-  
quence must be issued prior to any of the commands listed following to enable  
proper command execution.  
„
„
PPB Lock Bit Set Command  
PPB Lock Bit Status Read Command  
Reads from all banks are allowed.  
The PPB Lock Bit Set command is used to set the PPB Lock bit if it is cleared either  
at reset or if the Password Unlock command was successfully executed. There is  
no PPB Lock Bit Clear command. Once the PPB Lock Bit is set, it cannot be cleared  
unless the device is taken through a power-on clear (for Persistent Sector Protec-  
tion Mode) or the Password Unlock command is executed (for Password Sector  
Protection Mode). If the Password Mode Locking Bit is set, the PPB Lock Bit status  
is reflected as set, even after a power-on reset cycle.  
The programming state of the PPB Lock Bit can be verified by executing a PPB  
Lock Bit Status Read Command to the device.  
The Global Volatile Sector Protection Freeze Command Set Exit command  
must be issued after the execution of the commands listed previously to reset the  
device to read mode.  
64  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Volatile Sector Protection Command Set  
The Volatile Sector Protection Command Set permits the user to set the Dynamic  
Protection Bit (DYB), clear the Dynamic Protection Bit (DYB), and read the logic  
state of the Dynamic Protection Bit (DYB).  
The Volatile Sector Protection Command Set Entry command sequence  
must be issued prior to any of the following commands to enable proper com-  
mand execution.  
„
„
„
DYB Set Command  
DYB Clear Command  
DYB Status Read Command  
Note that issuing the Volatile Sector Protection Command Set Entry com-  
mand disables reads and writes for the bank selected with the command. Reads  
within that bank, will return the DYB status for that sector. Writes within that  
bank, will set the DYB for that sector. Reads for other banks excluding that bank  
are allowed, writes are not allowed. All Reads must be performed using the Asyn-  
chronous mode.  
The DYB Set/Clear command is used to set or clear a DYB for a given sector. The  
high order address bits (A23–A14 for the WS256N) are issued at the same time  
as the code 00h or 01h on DQ7-DQ0. All other DQ data bus pins are ignored dur-  
ing the data write cycle. The DYBs are modifiable at any time, regardless of the  
state of the PPB or PPB Lock Bit. The DYBs are cleared at power-up or hardware  
reset.  
The programming state of the DYB for a given sector can be verified by writing a  
DYB Status Read Command to the device.  
The Volatile Sector Protection Command Set Exit command must be issued  
after the execution of the commands listed previously to reset the device to read  
mode.  
Note that issuing the Volatile Sector Protection Command Set Exit command  
re-enables reads and writes for Bank 0.  
SecSi Sector Entry Command  
The SecSi Sector Entry Command allows the following commands to be executed  
„
„
Read from SecSi Sector  
Program to SecSi Sector  
Sector 0 is remapped from memory array to SecSi Sector array. Reads can be  
performed using the Asynchronous or Synchronous mode. Burst mode reads  
within SecSi Sector will wrap from address FFh back to address 00h. Reads out-  
side of sector 0 will return memory array data. Continuous burst read past the  
maximum address is undefined.  
Simultaneous operations are allowed except for Bank 0. Once the SecSi Sector  
Entry Command is issued, the SecSi Sector Exit command has to be issued to exit  
SecSi Sector Mode.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
65  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Command Definition Summary  
Bus Cycles (Notes 16)  
Third Fourth Fifth  
Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data  
Command Sequence  
(Note 1)  
First  
Second  
Sixth  
Seventh  
Asynchronous Read (Note 7)  
Reset (Note 8)  
1
1
RA  
RD  
F0  
XXX  
(BA)  
555  
(BA)  
X00  
Manufacturer ID  
4
6
555  
555  
AA  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
90  
90  
0001  
227E  
(BA)  
555  
(BA)  
X01  
(BA) (Note (BA)  
Device ID (Note 10)  
2200  
X0E  
10)  
X0F  
(BA)  
555  
(BA) (Note  
Indicator Bits  
4
555  
AA  
2AA  
55  
90  
X03  
12)  
Program  
4
6
1
555  
555  
SA  
AA  
AA  
29  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
PA  
A0  
25  
PA  
PA  
Data  
WC  
Write to Buffer (Note 18)  
Program Buffer to Flash  
PA  
PD  
WBL  
PD  
Write to Buffer Abort Reset (Note  
22)  
3
555  
AA  
2AA  
55  
555  
F0  
Chip Erase  
6
6
1
1
4
4
555  
555  
BA  
AA  
AA  
B0  
30  
AA  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
555  
80  
80  
555  
555  
AA  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
SA  
10  
30  
Sector Erase  
Erase/Program Suspend (Note 15)  
Erase/Program Resume (Note 16)  
Set Configuration Register  
Read Configuration Register  
BA  
555  
555  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
555  
D0  
C6  
X00  
X00  
CR  
CR  
(BA)  
555  
CFI Query (Note 18)  
1
3
2
2
2
98  
AA  
A0  
80  
80  
Unlock Bypass Entry (Note  
24)  
555  
XX  
2AA  
PA  
55  
PD  
30  
10  
555  
20  
Unlock Bypass Program  
(Notes 13, 14)  
Unlock Bypass Sector  
Erase (Notes 13, 14)  
XX  
SA  
Unlock Bypass Erase  
(Notes 13, 14)  
XX  
XXX  
Unlock Bypass CFI (Notes  
13, 14)  
1
2
XX  
XX  
98  
90  
Unlock Bypass Reset  
XXX  
00  
SecSi Sector Command Definitions  
SecSi Sector Entry (Note  
23)  
3
555  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
SA  
88  
25  
SecSi Sector Program  
SecSi Sector Read  
6
1
4
555  
00  
AA  
data  
AA  
SA  
XX  
WC  
00  
PA  
PD  
WBL  
PD  
SecSi Sector Exit (Note 26)  
555  
2AA  
55  
555  
90  
Lock Register Command Set Definitions  
Lock Register Command  
Set Entry (Note 23)  
3
2
555  
AA  
2AA  
77  
55  
555  
40  
Lock Register Bits Program  
(Note 25)  
XX  
77  
A0  
(Note data  
25)  
Lock Register Bits Read  
(Note 25)  
1
2
(Note data  
25)  
Lock Register Command  
Set Exit (Note 26)  
XX  
90  
XX  
00  
66  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
(Continued)  
Bus Cycles (Notes 16)  
Third Fourth Fifth  
Command Sequence  
First  
Second  
Sixth  
Seventh  
(Note 1)  
Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data  
Password Protection Command Set Definitions  
Password Protection  
Command Set Entry (Note  
23)  
3
2
555  
AA  
2AA  
55  
555  
60  
PWD  
0
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
00  
00  
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
00  
01  
02  
03  
01  
00  
PWD  
1
Password Program*  
PWD  
2
PWD  
3
PWD  
0
PWD  
1
PWD  
2
PWD  
3
Password Read**  
4
7
02  
00  
03  
01  
PWD  
0
PWD  
1
PWD  
2
PWD  
3
Password Unlock***  
25  
03  
02  
03  
00  
29  
Password Protection  
Command Set Exit (Note  
26)  
2
XX  
90  
XX  
00  
Non-Volatile Sector Protection Command Set Definitions  
(BA)  
Non-Volatile Sector  
Protection Command Set  
Entry (Note 23)  
3
555  
AA  
2AA  
55  
C0  
555  
(BA)  
SA  
PPB Program  
2
2
1
XX  
XX  
A0  
80  
00  
30  
All PPB Erase (Note 20)  
PPB Status Read  
XX  
(BA)  
SA  
RD  
(0)  
Non-Volatile Sector  
Protection Command Set  
Exit (Note 26)  
2
XX  
90  
XX  
00  
Global Non-Volatile Sector Protection Freeze Command Set Definitions  
Global Volatile Sector  
Protection Freeze  
Command Set Entry (Note  
23)  
3
555  
AA  
A0  
2AA  
XX  
55  
00  
555  
50  
PPB Lock Bit Set  
2
1
XX  
XX  
RD  
(0)  
PPB Lock Bit Status Read  
Global Volatile Sector  
Protection Freeze  
Command Set Exit (Note  
26)  
2
XX  
90  
XX  
00  
* Only A7-A0 used during 2nd cycle  
** Amax-A0 used during 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th cycle  
*** Only A7-A0 used during 3rd, 4th, 5th 6th cycle  
Volatile Sector Protection Command Set Definitions  
Volatile Sector Protection  
Command Set Entry (Note  
23)  
(BA)  
555  
3
555  
AA  
2AA  
55  
E0  
(BA)  
SA  
DYB Set  
2
2
1
XX  
XX  
A0  
A0  
00  
01  
(BA)  
SA  
DYB Clear  
(BA)  
SA  
RD  
(0)  
DYB Status Read  
Volatile Sector Protection  
Command Set Exit (Note  
26)  
2
XX  
90  
XX  
00  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
67  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Legend:  
X = Don’t care  
BA = Address of the bank (A23, A22, A21, and A20 for the WS256N/  
A22, A21, A20, that is being switched to autoselect mode, is in  
bypass mode, or is being erased.  
RA = Address of the memory location to be read.  
RD = Data read from location RA during read operation.  
CR = Configuration Register data bits DQ15–DQ0.  
PA = Address of the memory location to be programmed. Addresses  
latch on the rising edge of the AVD# pulse or active edge of CLK  
which ever comes first.  
PWD3–PWD0 = Password Data. PD3–PD0 present four 16 bit  
combinations that represent the 64-bit Password  
PWA = Password Address. Address bits A1 and A0 are used to select  
each 16-bit portion of the 64-bit entity.  
PD = Data to be programmed at location PA. Data latches on the  
rising edge of WE# or CE# pulse, whichever happens first.  
PWD = Password Data.  
PD(0) = SecSi Sector Lock Bit. PD(0), or bit[0].  
RD(0) = DQ0 protection indicator bit. If protected, DQ0 = 0, if  
unprotected, DQ0 = 1.  
PD(1) = Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit. PD(1), or bit[1], must  
be set to ‘0’ for protection while PD(2), bit[2] must be left as ‘1’.  
RD(1) = DQ1 protection indicator bit. If protected, DQ1 = 0, if  
unprotected, DQ1 = 1.  
PD(2) = Password Protection Mode Lock Bit. PD(2), or bit[2], must be  
set to ‘0’ for protection while PD(1), bit[1] must be left as ‘1’.  
RD(2) = DQ2 protection indicator bit. If protected, DQ2 = 0, if  
unprotected, DQ2 = 1.  
PD(3) = Protection Mode OTP Bit. PD(3) or bit[3].  
SA = Address of the sector to be verified (in autoselect mode) or  
erased. Address bits A23–A14 for the WS256N uniquely select any  
sector.  
WBL = Write Buffer Location. Address must be within the same write  
buffer page as PA.]  
WC = Word Count. Number of write buffer locations to load minus 1.  
Notes:  
1. See Table 2 for description of bus operations.  
2. All values are in hexadecimal.  
3. Except for the following, all bus cycles are write cycle: read  
cycle, fourth through sixth cycles of the Autoselect commands,  
fourth cycle of the configuration register verify and password  
verify commands, and any cycle reading at RD(0) and RD(1).  
4. Data bits DQ15–DQ8 are don’t care in command sequences,  
except for RD, PD, WD, PWD, and PWD3-PWD0.  
5. Unless otherwise noted, address bits A23–A12 for the WS256N  
are don’t cares.  
18. The total number of cycles in the command sequence is  
determined by the number of words written to the write buffer.  
The number of cycles in the command sequence is 37 for full  
page programming (32 words). Less than 32 word programming  
is not recommended.  
19. The entire four bus-cycle sequence must be entered for which  
portion of the password.  
20. The ALL PPB ERASE command will pre-program all PPBs before  
erasure to prevent over-erasure of PPBs.  
21. ACC must be at V during the entire operation of this command  
HH  
22. Command sequence resets device for next command after  
write-to-buffer operation.  
23. Entry commands are needed to enter a specific mode to enable  
instructions only available within that mode.  
6. Writing incorrect address and data values or writing them in the  
improper sequence may place the device in an unknown state.  
The system must write the reset command to return the device  
to reading array data.  
7. No unlock or command cycles required when bank is reading  
array data.  
24. Write Buffer Programming can be initiated after Unlock Bypass  
Entry.  
8. The Reset command is required to return to reading array data  
(or to the erase-suspend-read mode if previously in Erase  
Suspend) when a bank is in the autoselect mode, or if DQ5 goes  
high (while the bank is providing status information) or  
performing sector lock/unlock.  
9. The fourth cycle of the autoselect command sequence is a read  
cycle. The system must provide the bank address. See the  
"Autoselect Command Sequence" section  
25. If both the Persistent Protection Mode Locking Bit and the  
password Protection Mode Locking Bit are set a the same time,  
the command operation will abort and return the device to the  
default Persistent Sector Protection Mode during 2nd Bus cycle.  
Addresses will equal 00h on all future devices, but 77h for  
WS256N.  
26. The Exit command must be issued to reset the device into read  
mode. Otherwise the device will hang.  
10. WS25N6 = 2230  
11. The data is 0000h for an unlocked sector and 0001h for a locked  
sector  
12. See the "Autoselect Command Sequence" section  
13. The Unlock Bypass command sequence is required prior to this  
command sequence.  
14. The Unlock Bypass Reset command is required to return to  
reading array data when the bank is in the unlock bypass mode.  
15. The system may read and program in non-erasing sectors, or  
enter the autoselect mode, when in the Erase Suspend mode.  
The Erase Suspend command is valid only during a sector erase  
operation, and requires the bank address.  
16. The Erase Resume command is valid only during the Erase  
Suspend mode, and requires the bank address.  
17. Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or  
when device is in autoselect mode.  
68  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Write Operation Status  
The device provides several bits to determine the status of a program or erase  
operation: DQ1, DQ2, DQ3, DQ5, DQ6, and DQ7. Table 20 and the following sub-  
sections describe the function of these bits. DQ7 and DQ6 each offers a method  
for determining whether a program or erase operation is complete or in progress.  
DQ7: Data# Polling  
The Data# Polling bit, DQ7, indicates to the host system whether an Embedded  
Program or Erase algorithm is in progress or completed, or whether a bank is in  
Erase Suspend. Data# Polling is valid after the rising edge of the final WE# pulse  
in the command sequence. Note that the Data# Polling is valid only for the  
last word being programmed in the write-buffer-page during Write  
Buffer Programming. Reading Data# Polling status on any word other  
than the last word to be programmed in the write-buffer-page will return  
false status information.  
During the Embedded Program algorithm, the device outputs on DQ7 the com-  
plement of the datum programmed to DQ7. This DQ7 status also applies to  
programming during Erase Suspend. When the Embedded Program algorithm is  
complete, the device outputs the datum programmed to DQ7. The system must  
provide the program address to read valid status information on DQ7. If a pro-  
gram address falls within a protected sector, Data# Polling on DQ7 is active for  
approximately 1 µs, then that bank returns to the read mode.  
During the Embedded Erase algorithm, Data# Polling produces a “0” on DQ7.  
When the Embedded Erase algorithm is complete, or if the bank enters the Erase  
Suspend mode, Data# Polling produces a “1” on DQ7. The system must provide  
an address within any of the sectors selected for erasure to read valid status in-  
formation on DQ7.  
After an erase command sequence is written, if all sectors selected for erasing  
are protected, Data# Polling on DQ7 is active for approximately 100 µs, then the  
bank returns to the read mode. If not all selected sectors are protected, the Em-  
bedded Erase algorithm erases the unprotected sectors, and ignores the selected  
sectors that are protected. However, if the system reads DQ7 at an address within  
a protected sector, the status may not be valid.  
Just prior to the completion of an Embedded Program or Erase operation, DQ7  
may change asynchronously with DQ6–DQ0 while Output Enable (OE#) is as-  
serted low. That is, the device may change from providing status information to  
valid data on DQ7. Depending on when the system samples the DQ7 output, it  
may read the status or valid data. Even if the device has completed the program  
or erase operation and DQ7 has valid data, the data outputs on DQ6-DQ0 may  
be still invalid. Valid data on DQ7-DQ0 will appear on successive read cycles.  
Table 20 shows the outputs for Data# Polling on DQ7. Figure 5 shows the Data#  
Polling algorithm. Figure 24 in “AC Characteristics—Asynchronous” shows the  
Data# Polling timing diagram.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
69  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
START  
Read DQ7–DQ0  
Addr = VA  
Yes  
DQ7 = Data?  
No  
No  
DQ5 = 1?  
Yes  
Read DQ7–DQ0  
Addr = VA  
Yes  
DQ7 = Data?  
No  
PASS  
FAIL  
Figure 5. Data# Polling Algorithm  
RDY: Ready  
The RDY is a dedicated output, controlled by CE#, that indicates the number of  
clock cycles in the system should write before expecting valid data. When the de-  
vice is configured in the Synchronous mode and RDY is at logic low, the system  
should wait 1 clock cycle before expecting the next word of data. Using the RDY  
Configuration Command Sequence, RDY can be set so that a logic low indicates  
the system should wait 2 clock cycles before expecting valid data.  
The RDY output is at logic low if the frequency is greater than 66 MHZ during the  
initial access in burst mode and at the boundary crossing that occurs every 128  
words beginning with address 7Fh.  
DQ6: Toggle Bit I  
Toggle Bit I on DQ6 indicates whether an Embedded Program or Erase algorithm  
is in progress or complete, or whether the device has entered the Erase Suspend  
mode. Toggle Bit I may be read at any address in the same bank, and is valid  
after the rising edge of the final WE# pulse in the command sequence (prior to  
the program or erase operation), and during the sector erase time-out.  
During an Embedded Program or Erase algorithm operation, successive read cy-  
cles to any address cause DQ6 to toggle. When the operation is complete, DQ6  
stops toggling.  
After an erase command sequence is written, if all sectors selected for erasing  
are protected, DQ6 toggles for approximately 100 µs, then returns to reading  
70  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
array data. If not all selected sectors are protected, the Embedded Erase algo-  
rithm erases the unprotected sectors, and ignores the selected sectors that are  
protected.  
The system can use DQ6 and DQ2 together to determine whether a sector is ac-  
tively erasing or is erase-suspended. When the device is actively erasing (that is,  
the Embedded Erase algorithm is in progress), DQ6 toggles. When the device en-  
ters the Erase Suspend mode, DQ6 stops toggling. However, the system must  
also use DQ2 to determine which sectors are erasing or erase-suspended. Alter-  
natively, the system can use DQ7 (see the subsection on DQ7: Data# Polling).  
If a program address falls within a protected sector, DQ6 toggles for approxi-  
mately 1 ms after the program command sequence is written, then returns to  
reading array data.  
DQ6 also toggles during the erase-suspend-program mode, and stops toggling  
once the Embedded Program algorithm is complete.  
See the following for additional information: Figure 6, "DQ6: Toggle Bit I" section,  
Figure 25 (toggle bit timing diagram), and Table 19.  
Toggle Bit I on DQ6 requires either OE# or CE# to be deasserted and reasserted  
to show the change in state.  
START  
Read Byte  
(DQ7–DQ0)  
Address =VA  
Read Byte  
(DQ7–DQ0)  
Address =VA  
No  
Toggle Bit  
= Toggle?  
Yes  
No  
DQ5 = 1?  
Yes  
Read Byte Twice  
(DQ7–DQ0)  
Address = VA  
Toggle Bit  
= Toggle?  
No  
Yes  
Program/Erase  
Operation Not  
Program/Erase  
Operation Complete  
Complete, Write  
Reset Command  
Note: The system should recheck the toggle bit even if DQ5 = “1” because the toggle bit may stop toggling as DQ5  
changes to “1.” See the subsections on DQ6 and DQ2 for more information.  
Figure 6. Toggle Bit Algorithm  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
71  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
DQ2: Toggle Bit II  
The “Toggle Bit II” on DQ2, when used with DQ6, indicates whether a particular  
sector is actively erasing (that is, the Embedded Erase algorithm is in progress),  
or whether that sector is erase-suspended. Toggle Bit II is valid after the rising  
edge of the final WE# pulse in the command sequence.  
DQ2 toggles when the system reads at addresses within those sectors that have  
been selected for erasure. But DQ2 cannot distinguish whether the sector is ac-  
tively erasing or is erase-suspended. DQ6, by comparison, indicates whether the  
device is actively erasing, or is in Erase Suspend, but cannot distinguish which  
sectors are selected for erasure. Thus, both status bits are required for sector and  
mode information. Refer to Table 19 to compare outputs for DQ2 and DQ6.  
See the following for additional information: Figure 6, the "DQ6: Toggle Bit I" sec-  
tion, and Figure 25.  
Table 19. DQ6 and DQ2 Indications  
If device is  
and the system reads  
then DQ6  
and DQ2  
programming,  
at any address,  
toggles,  
does not toggle.  
at an address within a sector  
selected for erasure,  
toggles,  
toggles,  
also toggles.  
does not toggle.  
toggles.  
actively erasing,  
erase suspended,  
at an address within sectors not  
selected for erasure,  
at an address within a sector  
selected for erasure,  
does not toggle,  
returns array data,  
toggles,  
at an address within sectors not  
returns array data. The system can read  
from any sector not selected for erasure.  
selected for erasure,  
programming in  
erase suspend  
at any address,  
is not applicable.  
Reading Toggle Bits DQ6/DQ2  
Whenever the system initially begins reading toggle bit status, it must read DQ7–  
DQ0 at least twice in a row to determine whether a toggle bit is toggling. Typi-  
cally, the system would note and store the value of the toggle bit after the first  
read. After the second read, the system would compare the new value of the tog-  
gle bit with the first. If the toggle bit is not toggling, the device has completed  
the program or erase operation. The system can read array data on DQ7–DQ0 on  
the following read cycle.  
However, if after the initial two read cycles, the system determines that the toggle  
bit is still toggling, the system also should note whether the value of DQ5 is high  
(see the section on DQ5). If it is, the system should then determine again  
whether the toggle bit is toggling, since the toggle bit may have stopped toggling  
just as DQ5 went high. If the toggle bit is no longer toggling, the device has suc-  
cessfully completed the program or erase operation. If it is still toggling, the  
device did not completed the operation successfully, and the system must write  
the reset command to return to reading array data.  
The remaining scenario is that the system initially determines that the toggle bit  
is toggling and DQ5 has not gone high. The system may continue to monitor the  
toggle bit and DQ5 through successive read cycles, determining the status as de-  
scribed in the previous paragraph. Alternatively, it may choose to perform other  
72  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
system tasks. In this case, the system must start at the beginning of the algo-  
rithm when it returns to determine the status of the operation. Refer to Figure 6  
for more details.  
DQ5: Exceeded Timing Limits  
DQ5 indicates whether the program or erase time has exceeded a specified inter-  
nal pulse count limit. Under these conditions DQ5 produces a “1,indicating that  
the program or erase cycle was not successfully completed.  
The device may output a “1” on DQ5 if the system tries to program a “1” to a  
location that was previously programmed to “0.Only an erase operation can  
change a “0” back to a “1.Under this condition, the device halts the operation,  
and when the timing limit has been exceeded, DQ5 produces a “1.”  
Under both these conditions, the system must write the reset command to return  
to the read mode (or to the erase-suspend-read mode if a bank was previously  
in the erase-suspend-program mode).  
DQ3: Sector Erase Timer  
After writing a sector erase command sequence, the system may read DQ3 to de-  
termine whether or not erasure has begun. (The sector erase timer does not  
apply to the chip erase command.) If additional sectors are selected for erasure,  
the entire time-out also applies after each additional sector erase command.  
When the time-out period is complete, DQ3 switches from a “0” to a “1.If the  
time between additional sector erase commands from the system can be as-  
sumed to be less than 50 µs, the system need not monitor DQ3. See the "Sector  
Erase Command Sequence" section for more details.  
After the sector erase command is written, the system should read the status of  
DQ7 (Data# Polling) or DQ6 (Toggle Bit I) to ensure that the device has accepted  
the command sequence, and then read DQ3. If DQ3 is “1,the Embedded Erase  
algorithm has begun; all further commands (except Erase Suspend) are ignored  
until the erase operation is complete. If DQ3 is “0,the device will accept addi-  
tional sector erase commands. To ensure the command has been accepted, the  
system software should check the status of DQ3 prior to and following each sub-  
sequent sector erase command. If DQ3 is high on the second status check, the  
last command might not have been accepted.  
Table 20 shows the status of DQ3 relative to the other status bits.  
DQ1: Write to Buffer Abort  
DQ1 indicates whether a Write to Buffer operation was aborted. Under these con-  
ditions DQ1 produces a ‘1. The system must issue the Write to Buffer Abort Reset  
command sequence to return the device to reading array data. See the "Write  
Buffer Programming Operation" section for more details.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
73  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Table 20. Write Operation Status  
DQ7  
DQ5  
DQ2  
DQ1  
Status  
(Note 2)  
DQ6  
(Note 1)  
DQ3  
N/A  
(Note 2)  
(Note 4)  
Embedded Program Algorithm  
Embedded Erase Algorithm  
DQ7#  
0
Toggle  
Toggle  
INVALID  
0
0
No toggle  
Toggle  
0
Standard  
Mode  
1
N/A  
INVALID  
INVALID  
INVALID  
INVALID  
INVALID  
Reading within Program Suspended  
Sector  
Program  
Suspend  
Mode  
(Not  
Allowed)  
(Not  
Allowed)  
(Not  
Allowed)  
(Not  
Allowed)  
(Not  
Allowed)  
(Not  
Allowed)  
Reading within Non-Program  
Suspended Sector  
(Note 3)  
Data  
1
Data  
No toggle  
Data  
Data  
0
Data  
N/A  
Data  
Toggle  
Data  
Data  
N/A  
Erase  
Suspended Sector  
Erase-Suspend-  
Erase  
Suspend  
Mode  
Read  
Non-Erase  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Suspended Sector  
Erase-Suspend-Program  
BUSY State  
DQ7#  
DQ7#  
DQ7#  
DQ7#  
Toggle  
Toggle  
Toggle  
Toggle  
0
0
1
0
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
0
Write to  
Buffer  
(Note 5)  
Exceeded Timing Limits  
ABORT State  
0
1
Notes:  
1. DQ5 switches to ‘1’ when an Embedded Program or Embedded Erase operation has exceeded the maximum  
timing limits. Refer to the section on DQ5 for more information.  
2. DQ7 and DQ2 require a valid address when reading status information. Refer to the appropriate subsection  
for further details.  
3. Data are invalid for addresses in a Program Suspended sector.  
4. DQ1 indicates the Write to Buffer ABORT status during Write Buffer Programming operations.  
5. The data-bar polling algorithm should be used for Write Buffer Programming operations. Note that DQ7#  
during Write Buffer Programming indicates the data-bar for DQ7 data for the LAST LOADED WRITE-  
BUFFER ADDRESS location.  
74  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Absolute Maximum Ratings  
Storage Temperature  
Plastic Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .–65°C to +150°C  
Ambient Temperature  
with Power Applied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .–65°C to +125°C  
Voltage with Respect to Ground:  
All Inputs and DQs except  
as noted below (Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.5 V to VIO + 0.5 V  
VCC (Note 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –0.5 V to +2.5 V  
VIO  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –0.5 V to +2.5 V  
ACC (Note 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –0.5 V to +9.5 V  
Output Short Circuit Current (Note 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 mA  
Notes:  
1. Minimum DC voltage on input or DQs is –0.5 V. During voltage transitions, inputs or  
DQs may undershoot VSS to –2.0 V for periods of up to 20 ns. See Figure 7. Maximum  
DC voltage on input or DQs is VCC + 0.5 V. During voltage transitions outputs may  
overshoot to VCC + 2.0 V for periods up to 20 ns. See Figure 8.  
2. Minimum DC input voltage on pin ACC is -0.5V. During voltage transitions, ACC may  
overshoot VSS to –2.0 V for periods of up to 20 ns. See Figure 7. Maximum DC voltage  
on pin ACC is +9.5 V, which may overshoot to 10.5 V for periods up to 20 ns.  
3. No more than one output may be shorted to ground at a time. Duration of the short  
circuit should not be greater than one second.  
4. Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent  
damage to the device. This is a stress rating only; functional operation of the device at  
these or any other conditions above those indicated in the operational sections of this  
data sheet is not implied. Exposure of the device to absolute maximum rating conditions  
for extended periods may affect device reliability.  
9
20 ns  
20 ns  
20 ns  
+0.8 V  
VCC  
+2.0 V  
–0.5 V  
–2.0 V  
VCC  
+0.5 V  
1.0 V  
20 ns  
20 ns  
20 ns  
Figure 7. Maximum Negative Overshoot  
Waveform  
Figure 8. Maximum Positive Overshoot  
Waveform  
Operating Ranges  
Wireless (W) Devices  
Ambient Temperature (TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –25°C to +85°C  
Industrial (I) Devices  
Ambient Temperature (TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –40°C to +85°C  
Supply Voltages  
VCC Supply Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +1.65 V to +1.95 V  
VIO Supply Voltages: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +1.35 V to +1.70 V  
Notes: Operating ranges define those limits between which the functionality of the device  
is guaranteed.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
75  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
DC Characteristics  
CMOS Compatible  
Parameter  
Description  
Test Conditions (Note: 1 & 2)  
VIN = VSS to VCC, VCC = VCCmax  
VOUT = VSS to VCC, VCC = VCCmax  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
±1  
±1  
54  
Unit  
µA  
ILI  
Input Load Current  
ILO  
Output Leakage Current (Note 7)  
VCC Active burst Read Current  
VIO Non-active Output  
µA  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH  
WE# = VIH, burst length =  
8
,
54 MHz  
66 MHz  
54 MHz  
66 MHz  
54 MHz  
66 MHz  
54 MHz  
66 MHz  
36  
40  
32  
36  
28  
32  
24  
28  
mA  
60  
48  
54  
42  
48  
36  
42  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH  
,
WE# = VIH, burst length =  
16  
ICCB  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH  
,
WE# = VIH, burst length =  
32  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH  
,
WE# = VIH, burst length =  
Continuous  
IIO1  
OE# = VIH  
20  
30  
15  
3
30  
36  
18  
4
µA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
µA  
10 MHz  
5 MHz  
1 MHz  
VACC  
VCC Active Asynchronous Read Current  
(Note 3)  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH  
,
ICC1  
WE# = VIH  
1
5
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH  
,
ICC2  
VCC Active Write Current (Note 4)  
ACC = VIH  
VCC  
<35  
1
<52.5  
5
mA  
µA  
VACC  
CE# = RESET# =  
VCC ± 0.2 V  
ICC3  
VCC Standby Current (Note 5)  
VCC Reset Current  
VCC  
20  
20  
30  
30  
µA  
ICC4  
ICC5  
ICC6  
RESET# = VIL, CLK = VIL  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH, ACC = VIH  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH  
µA  
VCC Active Current  
(Read While Write)  
<50  
<60  
mA  
VCC Sleep Current  
20  
30  
<20  
µA  
mA  
mA  
V
VACC  
VCC  
<30  
<15  
Accelerated Program Current  
(Note 6)  
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH,  
VACC = 9.5 V  
IACC  
<20  
VIL  
VIH  
Input Low Voltage  
Input High Voltage  
VIO = 1.8 V  
VIO = 1.8 V  
–0.5  
0.4  
VIO – 0.4  
VIO + 0.4  
0.1  
VOL  
VOH  
VHH  
VLKO  
Output Low Voltage  
IOL = 100 µA, VCC = VCC min = VIO  
IOH = –100 µA, VCC = VCC min = VIO  
V
V
V
V
Output High Voltage  
VIO – 0.1  
8.5  
Voltage for Accelerated Program  
Low VCC Lock-out Voltage  
9.5  
1.4  
1.0  
Note:  
1. Maximum ICC specifications are tested with VCC = VCCmax.  
2. VCC= VIO  
3. The ICC current listed is typically less than 3 mA/MHz, with OE# at VIH  
.
4. ICC active while Embedded Erase or Embedded Program is in progress.  
5. Device enters automatic sleep mode when addresses are stable for tACC + 20ns. Typical sleep mode current is equal to ICC3  
6. Total current during accelerated programming is the sum of VACC and VCC currents.  
7. CE# must be set high when measuring the RDY pin.  
.
76  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Test Conditions  
Device  
Under  
Test  
C
L
Figure 9. Tes t Se tu p  
Table 21. Test Specifications  
Test Condition  
All Speed Options  
30  
Unit  
pF  
ns  
V
Output Load Capacitance, CL (including jig capacitance)  
Input Rise and Fall Times  
3.0 @ 54, 66 MHz  
0.0–VIO  
Input Pulse Levels  
Input timing measurement reference levels  
Output timing measurement reference levels  
VIO/2  
V
VIO/2  
V
Switching Waveforms  
Table 22. Key to Switching Waveforms  
WAVEFORM  
INPUTS  
OUTPUTS  
Steady  
Changing from H to L  
Changing from L to H  
Don’t Care, Any Change Permitted  
Does Not Apply  
Changing, State Unknown  
Center Line is High Impedance State (High Z)  
V
IO  
Input  
Measurement Level  
Output  
All Inputs and Outputs  
V
/2  
IO  
V
/2  
IO  
0.0 V  
Figure 10. Input Waveforms and Measurement Levels  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
77  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
VCC Power-up  
Parameter  
Description  
Te s t Set up  
Min  
Speed  
1
Unit  
ms  
µs  
tVCS  
VCC Setup Time  
VIO Setup Time  
tVIOS  
Min  
50  
Note:  
1. V >= V - 100mV and V ramp rate is > 1V / 100µs  
CC  
IO  
CC  
2. V ramp rate <1V / 100µs, a Hardware Reset will be required.  
CC  
t
VC  
V
CC  
t
VIO  
V
IO  
RESET#  
Figure 11. VCC Power-up Diagram  
Pin Capacitance  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Te st Co ndi tio n  
Typ  
4.2  
5.4  
3.9  
Max  
5.0  
8.5  
4.7  
Unit  
pF  
CIN1  
CIN2  
Cout  
Input Capacitance  
Output Capacitance  
Control Capacitance  
VIN=0  
Vout=0  
VIN=0  
pF  
pF  
78  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
AC Characteristics—Synchronous  
CLK Characterization  
Parameter  
Description  
CLK Frequency  
CLK Period  
54 MHz  
54  
66 MHz  
66  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
fCLK  
tCLK  
tCH  
tCL  
Max  
Min  
18.5  
15.1  
CLK High Time  
CLK Low Time  
CLK Rise Time  
CLK Fall Time  
Min  
7.4  
3
6.1  
3
ns  
ns  
tCR  
tCF  
Max  
t
CLK  
t
t
CH  
CL  
CLK  
t
t
CF  
CR  
t
CLK  
t
t
CH  
CL  
CLK DIVIDER  
t
t
CF  
CR  
Figure 12. CLK Characterization  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
79  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Synchronous/Burst Read @ VIO = 1.8 V  
Parameter  
JEDEC Standard  
Description  
Latency  
54 MHz  
66 MHz  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ms  
tIACC  
tBACC  
tACS  
tACH  
tBDH  
tCR  
Max  
Max  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Min  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Max  
Max  
Min  
Max  
69  
Burst Access Time Valid Clock to Output Delay  
Address Setup Time to CLK (Note 1)  
Address Hold Time from CLK (Note 1)  
Data Hold Time from Next Clock Cycle  
Chip Enable to RDY Valid  
Output Enable to Output Valid  
Chip Enable to High Z  
13.5  
5
11.2  
4
6
7
4
3
13.5  
13.5  
10  
10  
5
11.2  
11.2  
8
tOE  
tCEZ  
tOEZ  
tCES  
tRDYS  
tRACC  
tAAS  
tAAH  
tCAS  
tAVC  
tAVD  
tCKA  
tCKZ  
tOES  
tRCC  
Output Enable to High Z  
8
CE# Setup Time to CLK  
4
RDY Setup Time to CLK  
5
4
Ready Access Time from CLK  
Address Setup Time to AVD# (Note 1)  
Address Hold Time to AVD# (Note 1)  
CE# Setup Time to AVD#  
AVD# Low to CLK  
13.5  
5
11.2  
4
7
6
0
5
12  
13.5  
10  
5
4
10  
11.2  
8
AVD# Pulse  
CLK to access resume  
CLK to High Z  
Output Enable Setup Time  
Read cycle for continuous suspend  
4
1
Notes:  
1. Addresses are latched on the first of either the active edge of CLK or the rising edge of AVD#.  
2. Clock Divider option  
80  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Timing Diagrams  
5 cycles for initial access shown.  
18.5 ns typ. (54 MHz)  
t
CEZ  
t
CES  
CE#  
CLK  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
t
AVC  
AVD#  
t
AVD  
t
ACS  
Addresses  
Data (n)  
Aa  
t
BACC  
t
ACH  
Hi-Z  
t
t
Da  
Da + 1  
Da + 2  
Da + n  
IACC  
Da + 3  
t
t
BDH  
OEZ  
OE#  
t
RACC  
OE  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
RDY (n)  
t
CR  
t
RDYS  
Da  
Hi-Z  
Data (n + 1)  
RDY (n + 1)  
Da + 1  
Da + 1  
Da  
Da + 2  
Da + 1  
Da  
Da + n  
Da + n  
Da + n  
Da + 2  
Da + 1  
Da  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Data (n + 2)  
RDY (n + 2)  
Da  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Data (n + 3)  
RDY (n + 3)  
Da  
Hi-Z  
Notes:  
1. Figure shows total number of wait states set to five cycles. The total number of wait states can be  
programmed from two cycles to seven cycles.  
2. If any burst address occurs at “address + 1”, “address + 2”, or “address + 3”, additional clock delay cycles  
are inserted, and are indicated by RDY.  
3. The device is in synchronous mode.  
Figure 13. CLK Synchronous Burst Mode Read (rising active CLK)  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
81  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
t
CEZ  
7 cycles for initial access shown.  
t
CAS  
CE#  
CLK  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
t
AVC  
AVD#  
t
AVD  
t
AAS  
Aa  
Addresses  
Data  
t
BACC  
t
AAH  
Hi-Z  
t
Da  
Da + 1  
Da + n  
IACC  
t
t
ACC  
BDH  
t
OEZ  
OE#  
RDY  
t
t
RACC  
CR  
t
OE  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
t
RDYS  
Notes:  
1. Figure shows total number of wait states set to seven cycles. The total number of wait states can be  
programmed from two cycles to seven cycles. Clock is set for active rising edge.  
2. If any burst address occurs at “address + 1”, “address + 2”, or “address + 3”, additional clock delay cycles  
are inserted, and are indicated by RDY.  
3. The device is in synchronous mode.  
Figure 14. Synchronous Burst Mode Read  
7
cycles for initial access shown.  
t
CES  
CE#  
CLK  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
t
AVC  
AVD#  
t
AVD  
t
ACS  
AC  
Addresses  
Data  
t
BACC  
t
ACH  
t
DC  
DD  
BDH  
DE  
DF  
D8  
DB  
IACC  
t
OE#  
RDY  
t
CR  
t
RACC  
t
RACC  
t
OE  
Hi-Z  
t
RDYS  
Notes:  
1. Figure shows total number of wait states set to seven cycles. The total number of wait states can be  
programmed from two cycles to seven cycles. Clock is set for active rising edge.  
2. If any burst address occurs at “address + 1”, “address + 2”, or “address + 3”, additional clock delay cycles  
are inserted, and are indicated by RDY.  
3. The device is in synchronous mode with wrap around.  
4. DQ0–DQ7 in data waveform indicate the order of data within a given 8-word address range, from lowest to  
highest. Starting address in figure is the 4th address in range (AC).  
Figure 15. Eight-word Linear Burst with Wrap Around  
82  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
7
cycles for initial access shown.  
t
CES  
CE#  
CLK  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
t
AVC  
AVD#  
t
AVD  
t
ACS  
AC  
Addresses  
Data  
t
BACC  
t
ACH  
t
DC  
DD  
BDH  
DE  
DF  
D10  
D13  
IACC  
t
OE#  
RDY  
t
CR  
t
t
RACC  
t
RACC  
OE  
Hi-Z  
t
RDYS  
Notes:  
1. Figure shows total number of wait states set to seven cycles. The total number of wait states can be  
programmed from two cycles to seven cycles. Clock is set for active rising edge.  
2. If any burst address occurs at “address + 1”, “address + 2”, or “address + 3”, additional clock delay cycles  
are inserted, and are indicated by RDY.  
3. The device is in asynchronous mode with out wrap around.  
4. DQ–DQ7 in data waveform indicate the order of data within a given 8-word address range, from lowest to  
highest. Starting address in figure is the 4th address in range (AC).  
Figure 16. Eight-word Linear Burst without Wrap Around  
t
CEZ  
6
wait cycles for initial access shown.  
t
CES  
CE#  
CLK  
1
2
3
4
5
6
t
AVC  
AVD#  
t
AVD  
t
ACS  
Aa  
Addresses  
Data  
t
BACC  
t
ACH  
Hi-Z  
t
Da  
Da+1  
BDH  
Da+2  
Da+3  
Da + n  
OEZ  
IACC  
t
t
t
RACC  
OE#  
RDY  
t
CR  
t
OE  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
t
RDYS  
Notes:  
1. Figure assumes 6 wait states for initial access and synchronous read.  
2. The Set Configuration Register command sequence has been written with CR8=0; device will output RDY one  
cycle before valid data.  
Figure 17. Linear Burst with RDY Set One Cycle Before Data  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
83  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
AC Characteristics—Asynchronous  
Asynchronous Mode Read @ V pS = 1.8 V  
IO  
Parameter  
JEDEC  
Standard  
tCE  
Description  
54 MHz  
70  
66 MHz  
70  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Access Time from CE# Low  
Max  
Max  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Min  
Max  
Min  
tACC  
Asynchronous Access Time (Note 1)  
AVD# Low Time  
70  
70  
tAVDP  
tAAVDS  
tAAVDH  
tOE  
12  
10  
Address Setup Time to Rising Edge of AVD#  
Address Hold Time from Rising Edge of AVD#  
Output Enable to Output Valid  
5
4
7
6
13.5  
11.2  
Read  
Output Enable Hold Time  
0
0
tOEH  
Toggle and Data# Polling  
10  
10  
8
8
tOEZ  
tCAS  
Output Enable to High Z (Note 2)  
CE# Setup Time to AVD#  
Notes:  
1. Asynchronous Access Time is from the last of either stable addresses or the falling edge of AVD#.  
2. Not 100% tested.  
Timing Diagrams  
CE#  
t
O
OE#  
t
OEH  
WE#  
Data  
t
CE  
t
OEZ  
Valid RD  
t
ACC  
Addresses  
AVD#  
RA  
t
t
AAVDH  
CAS  
t
AVDP  
t
AAVDS  
Note: RA = Read Address, RD = Read Data.  
Figure 18. Asynchronous Mode Read with Latched Addresses  
84  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
CE#  
t
O
OE#  
t
OEH  
WE#  
Data  
t
CE  
t
OEZ  
Valid RD  
t
ACC  
Addresses  
RA  
AVD#  
Note: RA = Read Address, RD = Read Data.  
Figure 19. Asynchronous Mode Read  
Hardware Reset (RESET#)  
Parameter  
JEDEC Std  
tRP  
Description  
All Speed Options  
Unit  
RESET# Pulse Width  
Min  
1
ms  
Reset High Time Before Read (During Embedded Algorithms)  
to Read Mode (See Note)  
tRH  
Min  
30  
µs  
Reset High Time Before Read  
(NOT During Embedded Algorithms) to Read Mode (See Note)  
Note: Not 100% tested.  
CE#, OE#  
t
RH  
RESET#  
t
RP  
Figure 20. Reset Timings  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
85  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Erase/Program Operations @ VIO = 1.8 V  
Parameter  
JEDEC  
tAVAV  
Standard  
Description  
54 MHz  
66 MHz  
Unit  
ns  
tWC  
Write Cycle Time (Note 1)  
Min  
Min  
70  
5
70  
4
Synchronous  
ns  
tAVWL  
tAS  
Address Setup Time (Notes 2, 3)  
Address Hold Time (Notes 2, 3)  
Asynchronous  
Synchronous  
Asynchronous  
0
7
6
tWLAX  
tAH  
Min  
ns  
20  
tAVDP  
tDS  
AVD# Low Time  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Typ  
Typ  
12  
45  
10  
20  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
µs  
µs  
tDVWH  
tWHDX  
tGHWL  
Data Setup Time  
Data Hold Time  
tDH  
0
0
0
0
tGHWL  
tCAS  
Read Recovery Time Before Write  
CE# Setup Time to AVD#  
tWHEH  
tWLWH  
tWHWL  
tCH  
CE# Hold Time  
tWP  
Write Pulse Width  
30  
25  
tWPH  
tSR/W  
tWHWH1  
tWHWH1  
Write Pulse Width High  
20  
0
Latency Between Read and Write Operations  
Programming Operation (Note 4)  
Accelerated Programming Operation (Note 4)  
Sector Erase Operation (Notes 4, 5)  
Chip Erase Operation (Notes 4, 5)  
VACC Rise and Fall Time  
tWHWH1  
tWHWH1  
<9.4  
<4  
0.4  
tWHWH2  
tWHWH2  
Typ  
sec  
<104 (WS256N)  
tVID  
tVIDS  
tVCS  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
500  
1
ns  
µs  
µs  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
VACC Setup Time (During Accelerated Programming)  
VCC Setup Time  
50  
tELWL  
tCS  
CE# Setup Time to WE#  
5
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
tAVSW  
tAVHW  
tAVSC  
tAVHC  
tCSW  
AVD# Setup Time to WE#  
AVD# Hold Time to WE#  
AVD# Setup Time to CLK  
AVD# Hold Time to CLK  
Clock Setup Time to WE#  
5
Notes:  
1. Not 100% tested.  
2. Asynchronous read mode allows Asynchronous program operation only. Synchronous read mode allows both  
Asynchronous and Synchronous program operation.  
3. In asynchronous program operation timing, addresses are latched on the falling edge of WE#. In synchronous  
program operation timing, addresses are latched on the active edge of CLK or rising edge of AVD#.  
4. See the “Erase and Programming Performance” section for more information.  
5. Does not include the preprogramming time.  
86  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Program Command Sequence (last two cycles)  
Read Status Data  
V
IH  
CLK  
AVD  
V
IL  
t
AVS  
t
AVH  
t
AVD  
t
AS  
t
A
Addresses  
Data  
555h  
PA  
VA  
VA  
In  
Progress  
A0h  
DS  
PD  
Complete  
t
t
CA  
t
D
CE#  
t
C
OE#  
WE#  
t
W
t
WHWH1  
t
CS  
t
t
WPH  
t
WC  
VC  
V
CC  
Notes:  
1. PA = Program Address, PD = Program Data, VA = Valid Address for reading status bits.  
2. “In progress” and “complete” refer to status of program operation.  
3. A23–A14 for the WS256N are don’t care during command sequence unlock cycles.  
4. CLK can be either V or V  
.
IH  
IL  
5. The Asynchronous programming operation is independent of the Set Device Read Mode bit in the  
Configuration Register.  
Figure 21. Asynchronous Program Operation Timings: WE# Latched Addresses  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
87  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Program Command Sequence (last two cycles)  
Read Status Data  
t
AVCH  
CLK  
AVD  
t
AS  
t
AH  
t
AVSC  
t
AVDP  
Addresses  
Data  
PA  
555h  
VA  
VA  
In  
Progress  
A0h  
PD  
Complete  
t
t
DS  
CA  
t
D
CE#  
t
C
OE#  
WE#  
t
CSW  
t
WP  
t
WHWH1  
t
WPH  
t
WC  
t
VC  
V
CC  
Notes:  
1. PA = Program Address, PD = Program Data, VA = Valid Address for reading status bits.  
2. “In progress” and “complete” refer to status of program operation.  
3. A23–A14 for the WS256N are don’t care during command sequence unlock cycles.  
4. Addresses are latched on the first of either the rising edge of AVD# or the active edge of CLK.  
5. Either CE# or AVD# is required to go from low to high in between programming command sequences.  
6. The Synchronous programming operation is dependent of the Set Device Read Mode bit in the Configuration  
Register. The Configuration Register must be set to the Synchronous Read Mode.  
Figure 22. Synchronous Program Operation Timings: CLK Latched Addresses  
CE#  
AVD#  
WE#  
Addresses  
Data  
PA  
Don't Care  
A0h  
Don't Care  
PD  
Don't Care  
OE#  
ACC  
t
1 ms  
VIDS  
V
ID  
t
VID  
V
or V  
IH  
IL  
Note: Use setup and hold times from conventional program operation.  
Figure 23. Accelerated Unlock Bypass Programming Timing  
88  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
AVD#  
CE#  
t
CEZ  
t
CE  
t
OEZ  
t
CH  
t
OE  
OE#  
WE#  
t
OEH  
t
ACC  
High  
High  
Addresses  
VA  
VA  
Status  
Status  
Data  
Notes:  
1. Status reads in figure are shown as asynchronous.  
2. VA = Valid Address. Two read cycles are required to determine status. When the Embedded Algorithm  
operation is complete, and Data# Polling will output true data.  
Figure 24. Data# Polling Timings (During Embedded Algorithm)  
AVD#  
t
CEZ  
t
CE  
CE#  
t
OEZ  
t
CH  
t
OE  
OE#  
WE#  
t
OEH  
t
ACC  
High  
High  
Addresses  
Data  
VA  
VA  
Status  
Status  
Notes:  
1. Status reads in figure are shown as asynchronous.  
2. VA = Valid Address. Two read cycles are required to determine status. When the Embedded Algorithm  
operation is complete, the toggle bits will stop toggling.  
Figure 25. Toggle Bit Timings (During Embedded Algorithm)  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
89  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
CE#  
CLK  
AVD#  
Addresses  
OE#  
VA  
VA  
t
t
IACC  
IACC  
Data  
Status Data  
Status Data  
RDY  
Notes:  
1. The timings are similar to synchronous read timings.  
2. VA = Valid Address. Two read cycles are required to determine status. When the Embedded Algorithm  
operation is complete, the toggle bits will stop toggling.  
3. RDY is active with data (DQ8 = 0 in the Configuration Register). When DQ8 = 1 in the Configuration Register,  
RDY is active one clock cycle before data.  
Figure 26. Synchronous Data Polling Timings/Toggle Bit Timings  
Enter  
Embedded  
Erasing  
Erase  
Suspend  
Enter Erase  
Suspend Program  
Erase  
Resume  
Erase  
Erase Suspend  
Read  
Erase  
Suspend  
Program  
Erase  
Complete  
WE#  
Erase  
Erase Suspend  
Read  
DQ6  
DQ2  
Note: DQ2 toggles only when read at an address within an erase-suspended sector. The system may use OE# or CE#  
to toggle DQ2 and DQ6  
Figure 27. DQ2 vs. DQ6  
90  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Address boundary occurs every 128 words, beginning at address  
00007Fh: (0000FFh, 00017Fh, etc.) Address 000000h is also a boundary crossing.  
C124  
C125  
7D  
C126  
7E  
C127  
7F  
C127  
7F  
C128  
80  
C129  
81  
C130  
82  
C131  
83  
CLK  
7C  
Address (hex)  
(stays high)  
AVD#  
t
t
RACC  
RACC  
RDY(1)  
latency  
t
t
RACC  
RACC  
RDY(2)  
Data  
latency  
D124  
D125  
D126  
D127  
D128  
D129  
D130  
OE#,  
CE#  
(stays low)  
Notes:  
1. RDY active with data (DQ8 = 0 in the Configuration Register).  
2. RDY active one clock cycle before data (DQ8 = 1 in the Configuration Register).  
3. Cxx indicates the clock that triggers Dxx on the outputs; for example, C60 triggers D60.  
4. Figure shows the device not crossing a bank in the process of performing an erase or program.  
5. RDY will not go low and no additional wait states will be required if the Burst frequency is <=66 MHz and the  
Boundary Crossing bit (DQ14) in the Configuration Register is set to 0  
Figure 28. Latency with Boundary Crossing when Frequency > 66 MHz  
Address boundary occurs every 128 words, beginning at address  
00007Fh: (0000FFh, 00017Fh, etc.) Address 000000h is also a boundary crossing.  
C124  
C125  
7D  
C126  
7E  
C127  
7F  
C127  
7F  
CLK  
7C  
Address (hex)  
(stays high)  
AVD#  
t
t
RACC  
RACC  
RDY(1)  
latency  
t
RACC  
t
RACC  
RDY(2)  
Data  
latency  
D124  
D125  
D126  
D127  
Read Status  
OE#,  
CE#  
(stays low)  
Notes:  
1. RDY active with data (DQ8 = 0 in the Configuration Register).  
2. RDY active one clock cycle before data (DQ8 = 1 in the Configuration Register).  
3. Cxx indicates the clock that triggers Dxx on the outputs; for example, C60 triggers D60.  
4. Figure shows the device crossing a bank in the process of performing an erase or program.  
5. RDY will not go low and no additional wait states will be required if the Burst frequency is <=66 MHz and the  
Boundary Crossing bit (DQ14) in the Configuration Register is set to 0  
Figure 29. Latency with Boundary Crossing into Program/Erase Bank  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
91  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Data  
D0  
D1  
Rising edge of next clock cycle  
following last wait state triggers  
next burst data  
AVD#  
OE#  
total number of clock cycles  
following addresses being latched  
1
2
0
3
1
4
5
6
4
7
5
CLK  
2
3
number of clock cycles  
programmed  
Wait State Configuration Register Setup:  
DQ13, DQ12, DQ11 = “111” Reserved  
DQ13, DQ12, DQ11 = “110” Reserved  
DQ13, DQ12, DQ11 = “101” 5 programmed, 7 total  
DQ13, DQ12, DQ11 = “100” 4 programmed, 6 total  
DQ13, DQ12, DQ11 = “011” 3 programmed, 5 total  
DQ13, DQ12, DQ11 = “010” 2 programmed, 4 total  
DQ13, DQ12, DQ11 = “001” 1 programmed, 3 total  
DQ13, DQ12, DQ11 = “000” 0 programmed, 2 total  
Note: Figure assumes address DQ0 is not at an address boundary, active clock edge is rising, and wait state is set to  
“101”.  
Figure 30. Example of Wait States Insertion  
Last Cycle in  
Program or  
Sector Erase  
Read status (at least two cycles) in same bank  
and/or array data from other bank  
Begin another  
write or program  
command sequence  
Command Sequence  
t
t
t
t
WC  
WC  
RC  
RC  
CE#  
OE#  
t
OE  
t
GHWL  
t
OEH  
WE#  
Data  
t
t
OEZ  
WP  
t
W
t
ACC  
t
DS  
t
OEH  
t
D
PD/30h  
RD  
RD  
AAh  
t
SR/  
Addresses  
PA/SA  
RA  
RA  
555h  
t
AS  
AVD#  
t
AH  
Note: Breakpoints in waveforms indicate that system may alternately read array data from the “non-busy bank” while  
checking the status of the program or erase operation in the “busy” bank. The system should read status twice to ensure  
valid information.  
Figure 31. Back-to-Back Read/Write Cycle Timings  
92  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP) S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_ A1 June 28, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Erase and Programming Performance  
Parameter  
Typ (Note 1)  
<0.4  
Max (Note 2)  
Unit  
Comments  
64 Kword  
16 Kword  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
ACC  
VCC  
ACC  
VCC  
ACC  
VCC  
ACC  
2.5  
2
Sector Erase Time  
s
Excludes 00h  
programming prior to  
erasure (Note 4)  
<0.15  
<104 (WS256N)  
<86.7(WS256N)  
<9.4  
<208 (WS256N)  
<173.4 (WS256N)  
<18.8  
Chip Erase Time  
s
µs  
µs  
s
Effective Word Programming Time  
utilizing Program Write Buffer  
<4  
<8  
<300  
<600  
Total 32-Word Buffer  
Programming Time  
<64  
<128  
<335.5 (WS256N)  
<145.9 (WS256N)  
<671 (WS256N)  
<292 (WS256N)  
<20  
Excludes system level  
overhead (Note 5)  
Chip Programming Time (Note 3)  
Erase Suspend/Erase Resume  
µs  
µs  
Program Suspend/Program  
Resume  
<20  
Notes:  
1. Typical program and erase times assume the following conditions: 25°C, 1.8 V V , 10,000 cycles;  
CC  
checkerboard data pattern.  
2. Under worst case conditions of 90°C, V = 1.65 V, 100,000 cycles.  
CC  
3. The typical chip programming time is considerably less than the maximum chip programming time listed.  
Based upon single word programming, not page programming.  
4. In the pre-programming step of the Embedded Erase algorithm, all words are programmed to 00h before  
erasure.  
5. System-level overhead is the time required to execute the two- or four-bus-cycle sequence for the program  
command. See the "Command Definition Summary" section for further information on command definitions.  
6. Contact the local sales office for minimum cycling endurance values in specific applications and operating  
conditions.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family For Multi-chip Products (MCP)  
93  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
128Mb pSRAM  
(8M word x 16 bit) Pseudo SRAM with Page & Burst  
FEATURES  
„
„
„
„
„
„
Fast Access Cycle Time  
=70ns max  
t
CE  
8 words Page Read Access Capability  
=20ns max  
t
PAA  
Burst Read/Write Access Capability  
=11ns max  
t
AC  
Low Voltage Operating Condition  
V
=+2.6 to +3.1V  
DD  
V
=+1.65V to +1.95V  
DDQ  
Wide Operating Temperature  
=-30°C to +85°C  
T
A
„
„
Byte Control by UB# and LB#  
Low Power Consumption  
I
I
=35mA max  
=300 mA max  
DDA1  
DDS1  
„
Various Power Down mode  
Sleep, 16M-bit and 32M-bit Partial  
94  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
FUNCTION TRUTH TABLE  
Asynchronous Operation (Page Mode)  
Mode  
Note  
CE2pS2 CE#1pS  
CLK ADV# WE#  
OE#  
X
LB#  
X
UB#  
X
A22-0  
X
DQ0-7  
High-Z  
High-Z  
DQ8-15  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
RDY  
Standby  
(Deselect)  
H
H
L
H
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
H
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Output Disable  
*1  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
X
H
X
X
*5  
Output Disable  
(No Read)  
H
H
L
H
Valid High-Z  
Valid High-Z  
Output  
Valid  
Read (Upper Byte)  
Read (Lower Byte)  
Read (Word)  
Page Read  
L
Output  
Valid  
H
L
H
High-Z  
Valid  
Output Output  
Valid  
L
L
Valid  
Valid  
L
L/H L/H Valid  
*6  
*6  
No Write  
H
H
L
H
L
Valid Invalid  
Valid Invalid  
Invalid  
Input  
Valid  
Write (Upper Byte)  
Write (Lower Byte)  
Write (Word)  
*4  
H
L
Input  
Valid  
H
L
Invalid  
Valid  
Input  
Valid  
Input  
Valid  
L
Valid  
Power Down  
*2  
X
X
X
X
X
X
High-Z  
High-Z  
Note: L = VIL, H = VIH, X can be either VIL or VIH, High-Z = High Impedance  
*1: Should not be kept this logic condition longer than 1ms.  
Please contact local FUJITSU representative for the relaxation of 1ms limitation.  
*2: Power Down mode can be entered from Standby state and all DQ pins are in High-Z state.  
Data retention depends on the selection of Partial Size.  
Refer to "Power Down" in FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION for the details.  
*3: "L" for address pass through and "H" for address latch on the rising edge of ADV#.  
*4: OE# can be VIL during Write operation if the following conditions are satisfied;  
(1) Write pulse is initiated by CE#1 (refer to CE#1 Controlled Write timing), or  
cycle time of the previous operation cycle is satisfied.  
(2) OE# stays VIL during Write cycle.  
*5: Can be either VIL or VIH but must be valid before Read or Write.  
*6: Output is either Valid or High-Z depending on the level of UB# and LB# input.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
95  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
FUNCTION TRUTH TABLE (Continued)  
Synchronous Operation (Burst Mode)  
Mode  
Note  
CE2  
CE#1  
CLK  
ADV# WE#  
OE#  
LB#  
UB#  
A22-0  
DQ8-1  
DQ16-9  
WAIT#  
Standby  
(Deselect)  
H
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
High-Z High-Z  
High-Z  
*3  
Start  
Address Latch  
*4  
X
*4  
X
*7  
*8  
*8  
*11  
High-Z  
*1  
Valid High-Z High-Z  
Advance  
Burst Read to  
Next Address  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*9  
*9  
Output  
Valid  
Output Output  
Valid Valid  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
L
H
Burst Read  
Suspend  
*12  
High  
L
H
High-Z High-Z  
H
Advance  
Burst Write to  
Next Address  
*10  
Input  
Valid  
*10  
Input  
Valid  
*6  
X
*6  
X
*5  
L
*13  
High  
H
X
H
Burst Write  
Suspend  
*5  
H
*12  
High  
Input  
Invalid Invalid  
Input  
Terminate  
Burst Read  
X
X
X
H
X
X
X
H
X
High-Z High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Terminate  
Burst Write  
High-Z High-Z  
High-Z High-Z  
Power Down  
*2  
L
X
X
X
X
X
Notes:L = VIL, H = VIH, X can be either VIL or VIH,  
High-Z = High Impedance  
= valid edge,  
= positive edge of Low pulse,  
*1: Should not be kept this logic condition longer than 4ms.  
Please contact local FUJITSU representative for the relaxation of 4ms limitation.  
*2: Power Down mode can be entered from Standby state and all DQ pins are in High-Z state.  
Data retention depends on the selection of Partial Size.  
Refer to "Power Down" in FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION for the details.  
*3: Valid clock edge shall be set on either positive or negative edge through CR Set. CLK must be started and  
stable prior to memory access.  
*4: Can be either VIL or VIH except for the case the both of OE# and WE# are VIL. It is prohibited to bring the  
both of OE# and WE# to VIL  
*5: When device is operating in "WE# Single Clock Pulse Control" mode, WE# is don’t care once write operation  
is determined by WE# Low Pulse at the beginnig of write access together with address latching. Write  
suspend feature is not supported in "WE# Single Clock Pulse Control" mode  
*6: Can be either VIL or VIH but must be valid before Read or Write is determined. And once UB# and LB#  
inputs are determined, they must not be changed until the end of burst.  
*7: Once valid address is determined, input address must not be changed during ADV#=L.  
*8: If OE#=L, output is either Invalid or High-Z depending on the level of UB# and LB# input. If WE#=L,  
Input is Invalid. If OE#=WE#=H, output is High-Z.  
*9: Output is either Valid or High-Z depending on the level of UB# and LB# input.  
*10: Input is either Valid or Invalid depending on the level of UB# and LB# input.  
*11: Output is either High-Z or Invalid depending on the level of OE# and WE# input.  
*12: Keep the level from previous cycle except for suspending on last data. Refere to "WAIT# Output Function"  
in FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION for the details.  
*13: WAIT# output is driven in High level during write operation.  
96  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
STATE DIAGRAM  
Asynchronous  
Initial/Standby State  
Operation (Page Mode)  
Power Up  
Synchronous Operation  
(Burst Mode)  
Common State  
CR Set  
Pause Time  
Power  
Down  
Power  
Down  
@M=1  
@M=0  
CE2=H  
CE2=H  
Standby  
CE2=L  
Standby  
CE2=L  
CE2=CE#1=H  
Standby  
Asynchronous Operation  
CE#1=L  
CE#1=H  
CE#1=L &  
WE#=L  
CE#1=L &  
OE#=L  
CE#1=H  
Output  
Disable  
CE#1=H  
WE#=H  
OE#=L  
WE#=L OE#=H  
Address Change  
or Byte Control  
Write  
Read  
Byte Control  
Byte Control @OE#=L  
CE2=CE#1=H  
Standby  
Synchronous Operation  
CE#1=H  
CE#1=H  
CE#1=H  
CE#1=H  
Write  
Read  
Suspend  
Suspend  
CE#1=L,  
ADV# Low Pulse, ADV# Low Pulse,  
& WE#=L & OE#=L  
CE#1=L,  
WE#=H  
Write  
OE#=H  
OE#=L  
WE#=L  
ADV# Low Pulse  
Read  
ADV# Low Pulse  
ADV# Low Pulse  
(@BL=8 or 16, and after burst  
operationis completed)  
Note: Assuming all the parameters specified in AC CHARACTERISTICS are satisfied. Refer to the FUNCTIONAL DESCRIP-  
TION, AC CHARACTERISTICS, and TIMING DIAGRAM for details.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
97  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION  
This device supports asynchronous page read & normal write operation and syn-  
chronous burst read & burst write operation for faster memory access and  
features three kinds of power down modes for power saving as user configuable  
option.  
Power-up  
It is required to follow the power-up timing to start executing proper device  
operation. Refer to POWER-UP Timing. After Power-up, the device defaults to  
asynchronous page read & normal write operation mode with sleep power down  
feature.  
Configuration Register  
The Configuration Register (CR) is used to configure the type of device function  
among optional features. Each selection offeatures is set through CR Set sequence  
after Power-up. If CR Set sequence is not performed after power-up, the device  
is configured for asynchronous operation with sleep power down feature as default  
configuration  
CR Set Sequence  
The CR Set requires total 6 read/write operation with unique address. Between  
each read/write operation requires that device being in standby mode. Following  
table shows the detail sequence.  
Cycle #  
1st  
Operation  
Read  
Address  
7FFFFFh (MSB)  
7FFFFFh  
Data  
Read Data (RDa)  
2nd  
3rd  
Write  
RDa  
Write  
7FFFFFh  
RDa  
4th  
Write  
7FFFFFh  
X
5th  
Write  
7FFFFFh  
X
6th  
Read  
Address Key  
Read Data (RDb)  
The first cycle is to read from most significant address (MSB).  
The second and third cycle are to write back the data (RDa) read by first cycle.  
If the second or third cycle is written into the different address, the CR Set is  
cancelled and the data written by the second or third cycle is valid as a normal  
write operation.  
The forth and fifth cycle is to write to MSB. The data of forth and fifth cycle is  
don’t-care. If the forth or fifth cycle is written into different address, the CR Set  
is also cancelled but write data may not be written as normal write operation.  
The last cycle is to read from specific address key for mode selection. And read  
data (RDb) is invalid.  
Once this CR Set sequence is performed from an initial CR set to the other new  
CR set, the written data stored in memory cell array may be lost. So, it should  
perform the CR Set sequence prior to regular read/write operation if necessary  
to change from default configuration.  
98  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Continued)  
Address Key  
The address key has the following format.  
Address  
Pin  
Register  
Name  
Function  
Key  
Description  
Note  
A22-A21  
1
Unused bits muse be 1  
32M Partial  
*1  
00  
01  
16M Partial  
Partial  
Size  
A20-A19  
PS  
10  
Reserved for future use  
Sleep [Default]  
*2  
11  
000  
001  
010  
011  
100  
101  
110  
111  
Reserved for future use  
Reserved for future use  
8 words  
*2  
*2  
16 words  
Burst  
Length  
A18-A16  
BL  
Reserved for future use  
Reserved for future use  
Reserved for future use  
Continuous  
*2  
*2  
*2  
Synchronous Mode  
(Burst Read / Write)  
0
1
*3  
A15  
M
Mode  
Asynchronous Mode[Default]  
(Page Read / Normal Write)  
*4  
*2  
000  
001  
010  
011  
1xx  
0
Reserved for future use  
3 clocks  
Read  
Latency  
A14-A12  
RL  
4 clocks  
5 clocks  
Reserved for future use  
Reserved for future use  
Sequential  
*2  
*2  
Burst  
Sequence  
A11  
A10  
BS  
1
0
Burst Read & Burst Write  
Burst Read & Single Write  
Falling Clock Edge  
Rising Clock Edge  
Unused bits muse be 1  
Single  
Write  
SW  
1
*5  
0
Valid  
Clock Edge  
A9  
A8  
VE  
1
Write Control  
1
*1  
*5  
WE# Single Clock Pulse Control  
without Write Suspend Function  
0
A7  
WC  
WE# Level Control  
with Write Suspend Function  
1
1
A6-A0  
Unused bits muse be 1  
*1  
Notes*1: A22, A21, A8, and A6 to A0 must be all "1" in any cases.  
*2: It is prohibited to apply this key.  
*3: If M=0, all the registers must be set with appropriate Key input at the same time.  
*4: If M=1, PS must be set with appropriate Key input at the same time. Except for PS, all the other key inputs  
must be "1".  
*5: Burst Read & Single Write is not supported at WE# Single Clock Pulse Control.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
99  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Continued)  
Power Down  
The Power Down is low power idle state controlled by CE2. CE2 Low drives the  
device in power down mode and mains low power idle state as long as CE2 is kept  
low. CE2 High resume the device from power down mode.  
This device has three power down modes, Sleep, 16M Partial, and 32M Partial.  
The selection of power down mode is set through CR Set sequence. Each mode  
has following data retention features.  
Mode  
Data Retention Size  
Retention Address  
N/A  
Sleep [default]  
16M Partial  
32M Partial  
No  
16M bit  
32M bit  
000000h to 0FFFFFh  
000000h to 1FFFFFh  
The default state is Sleep and it is the lowest power consumption but all data will  
be lost once CE2 is brought to Low for Power Down. It is not required to perform  
CR Set sequence to set to Sleep mode after power-up in case of asynchronous  
operation.  
100  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Continued)  
Burst Read/Write Operation  
Synchronous burst read/write operation provides faster memory access that  
synchronized to microcontroller or system bus frequency. Configuration Register  
Set is required to perform burst read & write operation after power-up. Once CR  
Set sequence is performed to select synchronous burst mode, the device is  
configured to synchronous burst read/write operation mode with corresponding  
RL and BL that is set through CR Set sequence together with operation mode. In  
order to perform synchronous burst read & write operation, it is required to control  
new signals, CLK, ADV# and WAIT# that Low Power SRAMs don’t have.  
Burst Read Operation  
CLK  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
ADV#  
CE#1  
OE#  
High  
WE#  
DQ  
RL  
Q
Q
BL  
Q
High-Z  
High-Z  
1
2
BL  
WAIT#  
Burst Write Operation  
CLK  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
ADV#  
CE#1  
High  
OE#  
WE#  
DQ  
RL-1  
High-Z  
High-Z  
D
D
BL  
D
1
2
BL  
WAIT#  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
101  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Continued)  
CLK Input Function  
The CLK is input signal to synchronize memory to microcontroller or system bus  
frequency during synchronous burst read & write operation. The CLK input  
increments device internal address counter and the valid edge of CLK is referred  
for latency counts from address latch, burst write data latch, and burst read data  
out. During synchronous operation mode, CLK input must be supplied except for  
standby state and power down state. CLK is don’t care during asynchronous  
operation.  
ADV# Input Function  
The ADV# is input signal to indicate valid address presence on address inputs. It  
is applicable to synchronous operation as well as asynchronous operation. ADV#  
input is active during CE#1=L and CE#1=H disables ADV# input. All the address  
are determined on the positive edge of ADV#.  
During synchronous burst read/write operation, ADV#=H disables all address  
inputs. Once ADV# is brought to High after valid address latch, it is inhibited to  
bring ADV# Low until the end of burst or until burst operation is terminated. ADV#  
Low pulse is mandatory for synchronous burst read/write operation mode to latch  
the valid address input.  
During asynchronous operation, ADV#=H also disables all address inputs. ADV#  
can be tied to Low during asynchronous operation and it is not necessary to control  
ADV# to High.  
WAIT# Output Function  
The WAIT# is output signal to indicate data bus status when the device is operating  
in synchronous burst mode.  
During burst read operation, WAIT# output is enabled after specified time duration  
from OE#=L. WAIT# output Low indicates data out at next clock cycle is invalid,  
and WAIT# output becomes High one clock cycle prior to valid data out. During  
OE# read suspend, WAIT# output doesn’t indicate data bus status but carries the  
same level from previous clock cycle (kept High) except for read suspend on the  
final data output. If final read data out is suspended, WAIT# output become high  
impedance after specified time duration from OE#=H.  
During burst write operation, WAIT# output is enabled to High level after specified  
time duration from WE#=L and kept High for entire write cycles including WE#  
write suspend. The actual write data latching starts on the appropriate clock edge  
with respect to Valid Click Edge, Read Latency and Burst Length. During WE#  
write suspend, WAIT# output doesn’t indicate data bus status but carries the  
same level from previous clock cycle (kept High) except for write suspend on the  
final data input. If final write data in is suspended, WAIT# output become high  
impedance after specified time duration from WE#=H.  
This device doesn’t incur additional delay against accrossing device-row boundary  
or internal refresh orepation. Therefore, the burst operation is always started after  
fixed latency with respect to Read Latency. And there is no waitting cycle asserted  
in the middle of burst operation except for burst suspend by OE# brought to High  
or WE# brought to High. Thus, once WAIT# output is enabled and brought to  
High, WAIT# output keep High level until the end of burst or until the burst  
operation is terminated.  
When the device is operating in asynchronous mode, WAIT# output is always in  
High Impedance.  
102  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Continued)  
Latency  
Read Latency (RL) is the number of clock cycles between the address being latched  
and first read data becoming available during synchronous burst read operation.  
It is set through CR Set sequence after power-up. Once specific RL is set through  
CRSetsequence, writelatency, thatisthe numberof clockcyclesbetweenaddress  
being latched and first write data being latched, is automatically set to RL-1. The  
burst operation is always started after fixed latency with respect to Read Latency  
set in CR.  
CLK  
0
3
4
5
6
1
2
ADDRESS  
Valid  
ADV#  
CE#1  
OE# or WE#  
RL=3  
DQ [Out]  
WAIT#  
Q1  
D2  
Q2  
D3  
Q3  
D4  
Q4  
D5  
Q5  
D5  
High-Z  
DQ [In]  
WAIT#  
D1  
High-Z  
RL=4  
DQ [Out]  
WAIT#  
Q1  
D2  
Q2  
D3  
Q3  
D4  
Q4  
D5  
High-Z  
DQ [In]  
WAIT#  
D1  
High-Z  
RL=5  
DQ [Out]  
WAIT#  
Q1  
D2  
Q2  
D3  
Q3  
D4  
High-Z  
High-Z  
DQ [In]  
WAIT#  
D1  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
103  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Continued)  
Address Latch by ADV#  
The ADV# indicates valid address presence on address inputs. During synchronous  
burst read/write operation mode, all the address are determined on the positive  
edge of ADV# when CE#1=L. The specified minimum value of ADV#=L setup  
time and hold time against valid edge of clock where RL count begin must be  
satisfied for appropriate RL counts. Valid address must be determined with  
specified setup time against either the negative edge of ADV# or negative edge  
of CE#1 whichever comes late. And the determined valid address must not be  
changed during ADV#=L period.  
Burst Length  
Burst Length is the number of word to be read or write during synchronous burst  
read/write operation as the result of a single address latch cycle. It can be set on  
8, 16 words boundary or continuous for entire address through CR Set sequence.  
The bursttype issequentialthatisincrementaldecodingschemewithinaboundary  
address. Starting from initial address being latched, device internal address  
counter assign +1 to the previous address until reaching the end of boundary  
address and then wrap round to least significant address (=0). After completing  
read data out or write data latch for the set burst length, operation automatically  
ended except for continuous burst length. When continuous burst length is set,  
read/write is endless unless it is terminated by the positive edge of CE#1.  
Single Write  
Single Write is synchronous write operation with Burst Length =1. The device can  
be configured either to "Burst Read & Single Write" or to "Burst Read & Burst  
Write" through CR set sequence. Once the device is configured to "Burst Read &  
Single Write" mode, the burst length for syncronous write operation is always  
fixed1 regardlessofBLvaluessetinCR, while burstlengthfor read isin accordance  
with BL values set in CR.  
104  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Write Control  
The device has two type of WE# signal control method, "WE# Level Control" and  
"WE#Single ClockPulse Control", forsynchronouswrite operation. Itisconfigured  
through CR set sequence.  
CLK  
0
3
4
5
6
1
2
ADDRESS  
Valid  
ADV#  
CE#1  
RL=5  
WE# Level Control  
WE#  
t
WLD  
DQ [In]  
WAIT#  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
t
WLTH  
High-Z  
WE# Single Clock Pulse Control  
WE#  
t
WSCK  
t
CKWH  
DQ [In]  
D1  
DQ2  
D3  
D4  
t
WLTH  
WAIT#  
High-Z  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
105  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Continued)  
Burst Read Suspend  
Burst read operation can be suspended by OE# High pulse. During burst read  
operation, OE# brought to High suspends burst read operation. Once OE# is  
brought to High with the specified set up time against clock where the data being  
suspended, the device internal counter is suspended, and the data output become  
high impedance after specified time duration. It is inhibited to suspend the first  
data out at the beginning of burst read.  
OE# brought to Low resumes burst read operation. Once OE# is brought to Low,  
data output become valid after specified time duration, and internal address  
counter is reactivated. The last data out being suspended as the result of OE#=H  
and first data out as the result of OE#=L are the from the same address.  
CLK  
t
t
t
t
CKOH OSCK  
CKOH OSCK  
OE#  
t
t
t
t
t
AC  
AC  
OHZ  
AC  
AC  
Q
Q
Q
3
DQ  
Q
Q
4
1
2
2
t
t
t
t
CKQX  
CKQX  
OLZ  
CKQX  
t
CKTV  
WAIT#  
Burst Write Suspend  
Burst write operation can be suspended by WE# High pulse. During burst write  
operation, WE# brought to High suspends burst write operation. Once WE# is  
brought to High with the specified set up time against clock where the data being  
suspended, device internal counter is suspended, data input is ignored. It is  
inhibited to suspend the first data input at the beginning of burst write.  
WE# brought to Low resumes burst write operation. Once WE# is brought to Low,  
data input become valid after specified time duration, and internal address counter  
is reactivated. The write address of the cycle where data being suspended and  
the first write address as the result of WE#=L are the same address.  
Burst write suspend function is available when the device is operating in WE#  
level controlled burst write only.  
CLK  
t
t
t
t
CKWH WSCK  
CKWH WSCK  
WE#  
t
t
t
t
DSCK  
DSCK  
DS- CK  
D-SCK  
DQ  
D
D
D
D
D
4
1
2
2
3
t
t
t
DHCK  
DHCK  
DHCK  
High  
WAIT#  
106  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Continued)  
Burst Read Termination  
Burst read operation can be terminated by CE#1 brought to High. If BL is set on  
Continuous, burst read operation is continued endless unless terminated by  
CE#1=H. It is inhibited to terminate burst read before first data out is completed.  
In order to guarantee last data output, the specified minimum value of CE#1=L  
hold time from clock edge must be satisfied. After termination, the specified  
minimum recovery time is required to start new access.  
CLK  
ADDRESS  
ADV#  
Valid  
t
TRB  
t
t
t
t
CKCLH  
CKOH  
CHZ  
OHZ  
CE#1  
OE#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
High-Z  
t
AC  
t
CKQX  
Q
Q
2
1
Burst Write Termination  
Burst write operation can be terminated by CE#1 brought to High. If BL is set on  
Continuous, burst write operation is continued endless unless terminated by  
CE#1=H. It is inhibited to terminate burst write before first data in is completed.  
In order to guarantee last write data being latched, the specified minimum values  
of CE#1=L hold time from clock edge must be satisfied. After termination, the  
specified minimum recovery time is required to start new access.  
CLK  
ADDRESS  
ADV#  
Valid  
t
TRB  
t
t
t
CHZ  
CKCLH  
CKWH  
CE#1  
WE#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
High-Z  
t
t
D-  
D-  
D
D
2
1
t
t
DHCK  
DHCK  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
107  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS (See WARNING below.)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Value  
-0.5 to +3.6  
-0.5 to +2.6  
-0.5 to +2.6  
+50  
Unit  
V
Voltage of VDD Supply Relative to VSS  
V
DD  
Voltage of VDDQ Supply Relative to VSS  
Voltage at Any Pin Relative to VSS  
Short Circuit Output Current  
Storage Temperature  
V
V
DDQ  
V
, V  
V
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
I
mA  
oC  
T
-55 to +125  
STG  
WARNING: Semiconductor devices can be permanently damaged by application of stress (voltage, current,  
temperature, etc.) in excess of absolute maximum ratings. Do not exceed these ratings.  
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS (See WARNING below.)  
(Referenced to VSS)  
Parameter  
Notes  
Symbol  
Min.  
2.6  
1.65  
0
Max.  
3.1  
1.95  
0
Unit  
V
V
Supply Voltage  
DD  
V
V
DQ Supply Voltage  
Ground  
DDQ  
V
V
SS  
V
V
*0.8  
V
+0.2  
High Level Input Voltage  
Low Level Input Voltage  
Ambient Temperature  
*1  
*2  
V
IH  
DDQ  
DDQ  
V
V
*0.2  
DDQ  
-0.3  
-30  
V
IL  
T
85  
°C  
A
Notes*1: Maximum DC voltage on input and DQ pins are VDDQ+0.2V. During voltage transitions, inputs may positive  
overshoot to VDDQ+1.0V for periods of up to 5 ns.  
*2: Minimum DC voltage on input or DQ pins are -0.3V. During voltage transitions, inputs may negative  
overshoot VSS to -1.0V for periods of up to 5ns.  
WARNING: Recommended operating conditions are normal operating ranges for the semiconductor device. All the  
device’s electrical characteristics are warranted when operated within these ranges.  
Always use semiconductor devices within the recommended operating conditions. Operation outside these  
ranges may adversely affect reliability and could result in device failure.  
No warranty is made with respect to uses, operating conditions, or combinations not represented on the  
data sheet. Users considering application outside the listed conditions are advised to contact their FUJITSU  
representative beforehand.  
108  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
DC CHARACTERISTICS  
(Under Recommended Operating Conditions unless otherwise noted)Note *1,*2,*3  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Test Conditions  
= V to V  
Min.  
-1.0  
-1.0  
1.4  
Max.  
+1.0  
+1.0  
Unit  
µA  
µA  
V
I
V
V
V
I
Input Leakage Current  
Output Leakage Current  
Output High Voltage Level  
Output Low Voltage Level  
LI  
IN  
SS  
DDQ  
I
= V to V  
, Output Disable  
LO  
OUT  
DDQ  
SS  
DDQ  
V
= V  
(min), I  
= –0.5mA  
OH  
OH  
DDQ  
V
= 1mA  
0.4  
V
OL  
OL  
I
SLEEP  
10  
µA  
µA  
µA  
DDPS  
V
V
V
= V  
max.,  
DD  
DD  
V
Power Down  
= V  
max.,  
DD  
DDQ  
DDQ  
I
16M Partial  
32M Partial  
120  
150  
DDP16  
Current  
= V or V ,  
IN  
IH  
IL  
CE2 0.2V  
I
DDP32  
V
V
= V  
max., V  
= V  
DDQ  
max.,  
,
DD  
IN  
DD  
DDQ  
I
(including CLK)= V or V  
1.5  
mA  
DDS  
IH  
IL  
CE#1 = CE2 = V  
IH  
V
V
V
= V  
max., V  
= V  
max.,  
DD  
IN  
DD  
DDQ  
DDQ  
(including CLK) 0.2V or  
(including CLK) V  
V
Standby  
I
300  
µA  
DD  
DDS1  
– 0.2V,  
IN  
DDQ  
Current  
CE#1 = CE2 V  
– 0.2V  
DDQ  
V
= V  
max., V  
= V  
max.,  
DD  
DD  
DDQ  
DDQ  
tCK=min.  
0.2V or V V – 0.2V,  
DDQ  
I
350  
µA  
DDS2  
V
IN  
IN  
CE#1 = CE2 V  
– 0.2V  
DDQ  
V
V
V
= V  
max.,  
t
/ t  
=
WC  
DD  
DD  
RC  
I
35  
5
mA  
mA  
DDA1  
minimum  
= V  
max.,  
DDQ  
DDQ  
V
Active Current  
= V or V ,  
IN IH IL  
DD  
t
/ t  
1µs  
=
WC  
CE#1 = V and CE2= V  
,
IH  
RC  
IL  
I
DDA2  
I
=0mA  
OUT  
V
V
= V  
max., V  
= V  
max.,  
DD  
IN  
DD  
DDQ DDQ  
V
V
Page Read Current  
I
= V or V , CE#1 = V and CE2= V  
,
,
15  
30  
mA  
mA  
DD  
DD  
DDA3  
IH  
IL  
IL  
IH  
IH  
I
=0mA, t  
= min.  
PRC  
OUT  
V
V
= V  
max., V  
= V  
max.,  
DD  
IN  
DD  
DDQ  
DDQ  
= V or V , CE#1 = V and CE2= V  
IH  
IL  
IL  
Burst Access Current  
I
DDA4  
t
= t min., BL = Continuous,  
CK  
CK  
I
=0mA,  
OUT  
Notes*1: All voltages are referenced to Vss.  
*2: DC Characteristics are measured after following POWER-UP timing.  
*3: IOUT depends on the output load conditions.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
109  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
AC CHARACTERISTICS  
(Under Recommended Operating Conditions unless otherwise noted)  
ASYNCHRONOUS READ OPERATION (PAGE MODE)  
Value  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Unit  
Notes  
Min.  
70  
Max.  
1000  
70  
40  
70  
70  
30  
20  
1000  
t
Read Cycle Time  
CE#1 Access Time  
OE# Access Time  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
*1, *2  
*3  
RC  
t
CE  
t
*3  
OE  
t
Address Access Time  
*3, *5  
*3  
AA  
t
ADV# Access Time  
AV  
t
LB#, UB# Access Time  
20  
5
*3  
BA  
t
Page Address Access Time  
Page Read Cycle Time  
*3, *6  
*1, *6, *7  
*3  
PAA  
t
PRC  
t
Output Data Hold Time  
OH  
t
CE#1 Low to Output Low-Z  
OE# Low to Output Low-Z  
LB#, UB# Low to Output Low-Z  
CE#1 High to Output High-Z  
OE# High to Output High-Z  
LB#, UB# High to Output High-Z  
Address Setup Time to CE#1 Low  
Address Setup Time to OE# Low  
ADV# Low Pulse Width  
5
*4  
CLZ  
t
0
*4  
OLZ  
t
0
*4  
BLZ  
t
–5  
10  
10  
5
20  
20  
20  
*3  
CHZ  
t
*3  
OHZ  
t
*3  
BHZ  
t
ASC  
t
ASO  
t
*8  
VPL  
t
Address Hold Time from ADV# High  
Address Invalid Time  
AHV  
t
–5  
–5  
15  
10  
*5, *9  
*10  
AX  
t
Address Hold Time from CE#1 High  
Address Hold Time from OE# High  
CE#1 High Pulse Width  
CHAH  
t
OHAH  
t
CP  
Notes*1: Maximum value is applicable if CE#1 is kept at Low without change of address input of A3 to A22.  
If needed by system operation, please contact local FUJITSU representative for the relaxation of 1ms  
limitation.  
*2: Address Should Not Be Changed Within Minimum Trc.  
*3: The output load 50pF with 50ohm termination to VDDQ*0.5 V.  
*4: The output load 5pF without any other load.  
*5: Applicable to A3 to A22 when CE#1 is kept at Low.  
*6: Applicable only to A0, A1 and A2 when CE#1 is kept at Low for the page address access.  
*7: In case Page Read Cycle is continued with keeping CE#1 stays Low, CE#1 must be brought to High within  
4ms. In other words, Page Read Cycle must be closed within 4ms.  
*8: tVPL is specified from the negative edge of either CE#1 or ADV# whichever comes late.  
*9: Applicable when at least two of address inputs among applicable are switched from previous state.  
*10: tRC(min) and tPRC(min) must be satisfied.  
110  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
AC CHARACTERISTICS (Continued)  
ASYNCHRONOUS WRITE OPERATION  
Value  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Unit  
Notes  
Min.  
70  
0
Max.  
1000  
t
Write Cycle Time  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
*1, *2  
*3  
WC  
t
Address Setup Time  
AS  
t
ADV# Low Pulse Width  
10  
5
*4  
VPL  
t
Address Hold Time from ADV# High  
CE#1 Write Pulse Width  
AHV  
t
45  
45  
45  
15  
15  
15  
15  
0
*3  
*3  
*3  
*5  
*5  
*5  
CW  
t
WE# Write Pulse Width  
WP  
BW  
t
LB#, UB# Write Pulse Width  
CE#1 Write Recovery Time  
WE# Write Recovery Time  
LB#, UB# Write Recovery Time  
Data Setup Time  
t
WRC  
t
1000  
1000  
WR  
t
BR  
DS  
DH  
t
t
Data Hold Time  
t
OE# High to CE#1 Low Setup Time for Write  
–5  
*6  
*7  
OHCL  
OE# High to Address Setup Time  
for Write  
t
0
ns  
OES  
t
LB#, UB# Write Pulse Overlap  
CE#1 High Pulse Width  
30  
15  
ns  
ns  
BWO  
t
CP  
Notes*1: Maximum value is applicable if CE#1 is kept at Low without any address change. If the relaxation is needed  
by system operation, please contact local FUJITSU representative for the relaxation of 1ms limitation.  
*2: Minimum value must be equal or greater than the sum of write pulse (tCW, tWP or tBW) and write recovery  
time (tWRC, tWR or tBR).  
*3: Write pulse is defined from High to Low transition of CE#1, WE# or LB# / UB#, whichever occurs last.  
*4: tVPL is specified from the negative edge of either CE#1 or ADV# whichever comes late.  
*5: Write recovery is defined from Low to High transition of CE#1, WE# or LB# / UB#, whichever occurs first.  
*6: If OE# is Low after minimum tOHCL, read cycle is initiated. In other word, OE# must be brought to High  
within 5ns after CE#1 is brought to Low. Once read cycle is initiated, new write pulse should be input after  
minimum tRC is met.  
*7: If OE# is Low after new address input, read cycle is initiated. In other word, OE# must be brought to High  
at the same time or before new address valid. Once read cycle is initiated, new write pulse should be input  
after minimum tRC is met and data bus is in High-Z.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
111  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
AC CHARACTERISTICS (Continued)  
SYNCHRONOUS OPERATION - CLOCK INPUT (BURST MODE)  
Value  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Unit  
Notes  
Min.  
13  
18  
30  
4
Max.  
RL=5  
RL=4  
RL=3  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
*1  
*1  
*1  
t
Clock Period  
CK  
t
Clock High Time  
Clock Low Time  
CKH  
t
4
3
ns  
ns  
CKL  
t
Clock Rise/Fall Time  
*2  
CKT  
Notes*1: Clock period is defined between valid clock edge.  
*2: Clock rise/fall time is defined between VIH Min. and VIL Max.  
SYNCHRONOUS OPERATION - ADDRESS LATCH (BURST MODE)  
Value  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Unit  
Notes  
Min.  
–5  
–5  
5
Max.  
t
Address Setup Time to ADV# Low  
Address Setup Time to CE#1 Low  
Address Hold Time from ADV# High  
ADV# Low Pulse Width  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
*1  
*1  
ASVL  
t
ASCL  
t
AHV  
t
10  
5
*2  
*3  
*1  
*3  
*3  
VPL  
t
ADV# Low Setup Time to CLK  
ADV# Low Setup Time to CE#1 Low  
CE#1 Low Setup Time to CLK  
VSCK  
t
5
VLCL  
t
5
CLCK  
t
ADV# Low Hold Time from CLK  
Burst End ADV High Hold Time from CLK  
1
CKVH  
t
13  
VHVL  
Notes*1: tASCL is applicable if CE#1 brought to Low after ADV# is brought to Low under the condition where tVLCL  
is satisfied. The both of tASCL and tASVL must be satisfied if tVLCL is not satisfied.  
*2: tVPL is specified from the negative edge of either CE#1 or ADV# whichever comes late.  
*3: Applicable to the 1st valid clock edge.  
112  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
AC CHARACTERISTICS (Continued)  
SYNCHRONOUS READ OPERATION (BURST MODE)  
Value  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Unit  
Notes  
Min.  
3
Max.  
8000  
11  
t
Burst Read Cycle Time  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
RCB  
t
CLK Access Time  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
AC  
t
Output Hold Time from CLK  
CE#1 Low to WAIT# Low  
CKQX  
t
5
20  
20  
20  
11  
CLTL  
t
OE# Low to WAIT# Low  
0
OLTL  
t
ADV# Low to WAIT# Low  
0
VLTL  
t
CLK to WAIT# Valid Time  
3
CKTV  
t
WAIT# Valid Hold Time from CLK  
CE#1 Low to Output Low-Z  
OE# Low to Output Low-Z  
CKTX  
t
5
CLZ  
t
0
OLZ  
t
LB#, UB# Low to Output Low-Z  
CE#1 High to Output High-Z  
OE# High to Output High-Z  
LB#, UB# High to Output High-Z  
CE#1 High to WAIT# High-Z  
OE# High to WAIT# High-Z  
OE# Low Setup Time to 1st Data-out  
UB#, LB# Setup Time to 1st Data-out  
OE# Setup Time to CLK  
0
BLZ  
t
30  
26  
5
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
CHZ  
t
OHZ  
t
BHZ  
t
CHTZ  
t
OHTZ  
t
OLQ  
t
*3  
BSQ  
t
OSCK  
t
OE# Hold Time from CLK  
5
CKOH  
t
Burst End CE#1 Low Hold Time from CLK  
Burst End UB#, LB# Hold Time from CLK  
5
CKCLH  
t
5
ns  
ns  
ns  
CKBH  
BL=8,16  
26  
70  
*4  
*4  
Burst Terminate Recovery  
Time  
t
TRB  
BL=Continuous  
Notes*1: The output load 50pF with 50ohm termination to VDDQ*0.5 V.  
*2: The output load 5pF without any other load.  
*3: Once they are determined, they must not be changed until the end of burst.  
*4: Defined from the Low to High transition of CE#1 to the High to Low transition of either ADV# or CE#1  
whichever occurs late.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
113  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
AC CHARACTERISTICS (Continued)  
SYNCHRONOUS WRITE OPERATION (BURST MODE)  
Value  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Unit  
Notes  
Min.  
5
Max.  
8000  
t
Burst Write Cycle Time  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
WCB  
t
Data Setup Time to Clock  
DSCK  
t
Data Hold Time from CLK  
3
DHCK  
t
WE# Low Setup Time to 1st Data In  
UB#, LB# Setup Time for Write  
WE# Setup Time to CLK  
30  
–5  
5
WLD  
t
*1  
BS  
t
WSCK  
t
WE# Hold Time from CLK  
5
CKWH  
t
CE#1 Low to WAIT# High  
5
20  
20  
20  
20  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
CLTH  
t
WE# Low to WAIT# High  
0
WLTH  
t
CE#1 High to WAIT# High-Z  
WE# High to WAIT# High-Z  
5
CHTZ  
t
WHTZ  
t
Burst End CE#1 Low Hold Time from CLK  
Burst End CE#1 High Setup Time to next CLK  
Burst End UB#, LB# Hold Time from CLK  
Burst Write Recovery Time  
CKCLH  
t
5
CHCK  
t
5
CKBH  
t
26  
26  
70  
*3  
*4  
*4  
WRB  
t
BL=8,16  
TRB  
Burst Terminate Recovery  
Time  
t
BL=Continuous  
TRB  
Notes*1: Defined from the valid input edge to the High to Low transition of either ADV#, CE#1, or WE#, whichever  
occurs last. And once they are determined, they must not be changed until the end of burst.  
*2: The output load 50pF with 50ohm termination to VDDQ*0.5 V.  
*3: Defined from the valid clock edge where last data-in being latched at the end of burst write to the High to  
Low transition of either ADV# or CE#1 whichever occurs late for the next access.  
*4: Defined from the Low to High transition of CE#1 to the High to Low transition of either ADV# or CE#1  
whichever occurs late for the next access.  
114  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
AC CHARACTERISTICS (Continued)  
POWER DOWN PARAMETERS  
Value  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Unit  
Note  
Min.  
Max.  
t
CE2 Low Setup Time for Power Down Entry  
CE2 Low Hold Time after Power Down Entry  
20  
70  
ns  
ns  
*1  
*1  
CSP  
t
C2LP  
CE#1 High Hold Time following CE2 High  
after Power Down Exit [SLEEP mode only]  
t
300  
1
µs  
µs  
µs  
*1  
*2  
*1  
CHH  
CE#1 High Hold Time following CE2 High  
after Power Down Exit [not in SLEEP mode]  
t
CHHP  
CE#1 High Setup Time following CE2 High  
after Power Down Exit  
t
0
CHS  
Notes*1: Applicable also to power-up.  
*2: Applicable when Partial mode is set.  
OTHER TIMING PARAMETERS  
Value  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Unit  
Note  
Min.  
10  
Max.  
t
CE#1 High to OE# Invalid Time for Standby Entry  
CE#1 High to WE# Invalid Time for Standby Entry  
CE2 High Hold Time after Power-up  
ns  
ns  
µs  
µs  
µs  
CHOX  
t
10  
*1  
CHWX  
t
50  
C2HL  
t
CE#1 High Hold Time following CE2 High after Power-up  
Input Transition Time (except for CLK)  
300  
1
CHH  
t
25  
*2, *3  
T
Notes*1: Some data might be written into any address location if tCHWX(min) is not satisfied.  
*2: Except for clock input transition time.  
*3: The Input Transition Time (tT) at AC testing is shown in below. If actual tT is longer than specified values,  
it may violate AC specification of some timing parameters.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
115  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
AC CHARACTERISTICS (Continued)  
AC TEST CONDITIONS  
Symbol  
Description  
Test Setup  
Value  
Unit  
V
Note  
V
V
V
V
* 0.8  
Input High Level  
IH  
IOPS  
IOPS  
IOPS  
V
* 0.2  
* 0.5  
Input Low Level  
V
IL  
V
Input Timing Measurement Level  
V
REF  
Async.  
5
ns  
ns  
Input Transition  
Time  
t
Between V and V  
IL IH  
T
Sync.  
3
AC MEASUREMENT OUTPUT LOAD CIRCUIT  
V
*0.5V  
DDQ  
50ohm  
V
CCPS  
0.1µF  
0.1µF  
DEVICE  
UNDER  
TEST  
V
SS  
OUT  
V
CCPS  
V
50pF  
SS  
116  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS  
Asynchronous Read Timing #1-1 (Basic Timing).  
t
RC  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS  
ADV#  
Low  
t
t
t
t
ASC  
ASC  
CE  
CHAH  
CE#1  
OE#  
t
CP  
t
t
OE  
CHZ  
t
OHZ  
t
BA  
LB# / UB#  
t
BHZ  
t
BLZ  
t
OLZ  
DQ  
(Output)  
VALID DATA OUTPUT  
t
OH  
Note:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H and WE#=H.  
Asynchronous Read Timing #1-2 (Basic Timing)  
t
RC  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS  
ADV#  
t
AHV  
t
AV  
t
VPL  
t
t
ASC  
ASC  
t
CE  
CE#1  
t
CP  
t
t
OE  
CHZ  
OE#  
t
OHZ  
t
BA  
LB# / UB#  
t
BHZ  
t
BLZ  
t
OLZ  
DQ  
(Output)  
VALID DATA OUTPUT  
t
OH  
Note:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H and WE#=H.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
117  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Asynchronous Read Timing #2 (OE# & Address Access)  
t
Ax  
t
t
RC  
RC  
ADDRESS  
CE#1  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS VALID  
t
t
t
OHAH  
AA  
AA  
Low  
t
t
OE  
ASO  
OE#  
LB# / UB#  
t
t
t
OLZ  
OH  
OHZ  
t
OH  
DQ  
(Output)  
VALID DATA OUTPUT  
VALID DATA OUTPUT  
Notes:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, ADV#=L and WE#=H.  
Asynchronous Read Timing #3 (LB# / UB# Byte Access)  
t
t
t
Ax  
AX  
RC  
ADDRESS  
CE#1,  
ADDRESS VALID  
t
AA  
Low  
t
t
BA  
BA  
LB#  
UB#  
t
BA  
t
t
BHZ  
BHZ  
t
t
t
t
OH  
BLZ  
OH  
BLZ  
DQ0-7  
(Output)  
VALID DATA  
OUTPUT  
t
BHZ  
VALID DATA  
OUTPUT  
t
t
OH  
BLZ  
DQ8-15  
(Output)  
VALID DATA OUTPUT  
Note:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, ADV#=L and WE#=H.  
118  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Asynchronous Read Timing #4 (Page Address Access after CE#1 Control Access)  
t
RC  
ADDRESS  
(A22-A3)  
ADDRESS VALID  
t
t
t
t
PRC  
RC  
PRC  
PRC  
ADDRESS  
(A2-A0)  
ADDRESS  
VALID  
ADDRESS  
VALID  
ADDRESS  
VALID  
ADDRESS VALID  
t
t
t
t
PAA  
PAA  
PAA  
ASC  
t
CHAH  
ADV#  
CE#1  
t
CHZ  
t
CE  
OE#  
LB# / UB#  
t
t
t
t
t
OH  
OH  
CLZ  
OH  
OH  
DQ  
(Output)  
VALID DATA OUTPUT  
(Page Access)  
VALID DATA OUTPUT  
(Normal Access)  
Notes:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H and WE#=H.  
Asynchronous Read Timing #5 (Random and Page Address Access)  
t
t
t
t
Ax  
RC  
AX  
RC  
ADDRESS  
(A22-A3)  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS VALID  
t
t
t
t
PRC  
RC  
PRC  
RC  
ADDRESS  
(A2-A0)  
ADDRESS  
VALID  
ADDRESS  
VALID  
ADDRESS  
VALID  
ADDRESS  
VALID  
t
t
t
t
PAA  
AA  
PAA  
AA  
CE#1  
Low  
t
t
t
ASO  
OE  
BA  
OE#  
LB# / UB#  
t
OLZ  
t
t
t
t
OH  
OH  
OH  
OH  
t
BLZ  
DQ  
(Output)  
VALID DATA OUTPUT  
(Page Access)  
VALID DATA OUTPUT  
(Normal Access)  
Notes*1: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, ADV#=L and WE#=H.  
*2: Either or both LB# and UB# must be Low when both CE#1 and OE# are Low.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
119  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Asynchronous Write Timing #1-1 (Basic Timing)  
t
WC  
ADDRESS  
ADV#  
ADDRESS VALID  
Low  
t
t
t
t
AS  
AS  
CW  
WRC  
CE#1  
t
t
t
t
t
AS  
AS  
WP  
WR  
BR  
WE#  
t
t
t
AS  
AS  
BW  
LB#, UB#  
t
OHCL  
OE#  
t
t
DH  
DS  
DQ  
(Input)  
VALID DATA INPUT  
Notes:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H and ADV#=L.  
Asynchronous Write Timing #1-2 (Basic Timing)  
t
WC  
ADDRESS  
ADV#  
ADDRESS VALID  
t
t
VPL  
AHV  
t
t
t
t
AS  
AS  
CW  
WRC  
CE#1  
WE#  
t
t
t
t
t
AS  
AS  
WP  
WR  
t
t
t
AS  
AS  
BW  
BR  
LB#, UB#  
OE#  
t
OHCL  
t
t
DH  
DS  
DQ  
(Input)  
VALID DATA INPUT  
Notes:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H.  
120  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Asynchronous Write Timing #2 (WE# Control)  
t
t
WC  
WC  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS  
CE#1  
t
OHAH  
Low  
t
t
t
t
t
t
WR  
AS  
WP  
WR  
AS  
WP  
WE#  
LB#, UB#  
OE#  
t
OES  
t
t
t
t
t
DH  
OHZ  
DS  
DH  
DS  
DQ  
(Input)  
VALID DATA INPUT  
VALID DATA INPUT  
Note:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H and ADV#=L.  
Asynchronous Write Timing #3-1 (WE# / LB# / UB# Byte Write Control)  
t
t
WC  
WC  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS  
CE#1  
Low  
t
t
t
t
WP  
AS  
WP  
AS  
WE#  
LB#  
UB#  
t
t
BR  
t
BR  
t
DS  
DH  
DQ0-7  
(Input)  
t
t
DH  
VALID DATA INPUT  
DS  
DQ8-15  
(Input)  
VALID DATA INPUT  
Note:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, ADV#=L and OE#=H.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
121  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Asynchronous Write Timing #3-2 (WE# / LB# / UB# Byte Write Control)  
t
t
WC  
WC  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS  
CE#1  
Low  
t
t
WR  
WR  
WE#  
LB#  
UB#  
t
t
BW  
AS  
t
t
BW  
AS  
t
t
DH  
DS  
DQ0-7  
(Input)  
t
t
DH  
VALID DATA INPUT  
DS  
DQ8-15  
(Input)  
VALID DATA INPUT  
Note:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, ADV#=L and OE#=H.  
Asynchronous Write Timing #3-3 (WE# / LB# / UB# Byte Write Control)  
t
t
WC  
WC  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS  
CE#1  
Low  
WE#  
LB#  
UB#  
t
t
t
t
AS  
BW  
BR  
t
t
t
BR  
AS  
BW  
t
DS  
DH  
DQ0-7  
(Input)  
VALID DATA INPUT  
t
t
DH  
DS  
DQ8-15  
(Input)  
VALID DATA INPUT  
Note:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, ADV#=L and OE#=H.  
122  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Asynchronous Write Timing #3-4 (WE# / LB# / UB# Byte Write Control)  
t
t
WC  
WC  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS VALID  
ADDRESS  
CE#1  
Low  
WE#  
LB#  
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
BR  
AS  
BW  
BR  
AS  
BW  
BWO  
t
t
t
DH  
DH  
DS  
VALID  
t
DS  
VALID  
DQ1-8  
(Input)  
DATA INPUT  
DATA INPUT  
t
t
t
t
t
BR  
AS  
BW  
BR  
AS  
t
BWO  
t
BW  
UB#  
t
t
t
t
DH  
DS  
DH  
DS  
DQ9-16  
(Input)  
VALID  
VALID  
DATA INPUT  
DATA INPUT  
Note:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, ADV#=L and OE#=H.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
123  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Asynchronous Read / Write Timing #1-1 (CE#1 Control)  
t
t
RC  
WC  
ADDRESS  
CE#1  
WRITE ADDRESS  
READ ADDRESS  
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
CHAH  
CHAH  
AS  
CW  
WRC  
ASC  
CE  
t
t
CP  
CP  
WE#  
UB#, LB#  
OE#  
t
OHCL  
t
CHZ  
t
t
t
t
OH  
DS  
DH  
CLZ  
t
OH  
DQ  
READ DATA OUTPUT  
WRITE DATA INPUT  
Notes*1: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H and ADV#=L.  
*2: Write address is valid from either CE#1 or WE# of last falling edge.  
Asynchronous Read / Write Timing #1-2 (CE#1 / WE# / OE# Control)  
t
t
RC  
WC  
ADDRESS  
CE#1  
WRITE ADDRESS  
READ ADDRESS  
t
t
t
t
t
t
CHAH  
CHAH  
AS  
WR  
ASC  
CE  
t
t
CP  
CP  
t
WP  
WE#  
UB#, LB#  
OE#  
t
t
OE  
OHCL  
t
CHZ  
t
t
t
t
OH  
DS  
DH  
OLZ  
t
OH  
DQ  
READ DATA OUTPUT  
WRITE DATA INPUT  
READ DATA OUTPUT  
Notes*1: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H and ADV#=L.  
*2: OE# can be fixed Low during write operation if it is CE#1 controlled write at Read-Write-Read sequence.  
124  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Asynchronous Read / Write Timing #2 (OE#, WE# Control)  
t
t
RC  
WC  
ADDRESS  
CE#1  
WRITE ADDRESS  
READ ADDRESS  
t
t
OHAH  
t
OHAH  
AA  
Low  
t
t
WR  
t
AS  
WP  
WE#  
t
OES  
UB#, LB#  
t
t
ASO  
OE  
OE#  
DQ  
t
t
OHZ  
OHZ  
t
t
t
DH  
OLZ  
DS  
t
t
OH  
OH  
READ DATA OUTPUT  
Notes*1: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H and ADV#=L.  
READ DATA OUTPUT  
WRITE DATA INPUT  
*2: CE#1 can be tied to Low for WE# and OE# controlled operation.  
Asynchronous Read / Write Timing #3 (OE#, WE#, LB#, UB# Control)  
t
t
RC  
WC  
ADDRESS  
CE#1  
WRITE ADDRESS  
READ ADDRESS  
t
AA  
t
t
OHAH  
OHAH  
Low  
WE#  
t
t
t
t
t
t
BA  
OE  
AS  
BW  
BR  
UB#, LB#  
OE#  
t
t
t
ASO  
BHZ  
OH  
t
BHZ  
t
t
BLZ  
DS  
DH  
t
OH  
DQ  
READ DATA OUTPUT  
READ DATA OUTPUT  
WRITE DATA INPUT  
Notes*1: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H and ADV#=L.  
*2: CE#1 can be tied to Low for WE# and OE# controlled operation.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
125  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Clock Input Timing  
t
CK  
CLK  
t
t
t
t
t
CKT  
CK  
CKH  
CKL  
CKT  
Notes*1: Stable clock input must be required during CE#1=L.  
*2: tCK is defined between valid clock edge.  
*3: tCKT is defined between VIH Min. and VIL Max.  
Address Latch Timing (Synchronous Mode)  
Case #1  
Case #2  
Valid  
CLK  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
t
t
t
t
t
t
AHV  
ASCL  
CKVH  
AHV  
VSCK  
CKVH  
t
ASVL  
t
VSCK  
ADV#  
CE#1  
t
t
VPL  
VPL  
t
VLCL  
t
CLCK  
Low  
Notes*1: Case #1 is the timing when CE#1 is brought to Low after ADV# is brought to Low.  
Case #2 is the timing when ADV# is brought to Low after CE#1 is brought to Low.  
*2: tVPL is specified from the negative edge of either CE#1 or ADV# whichever comes late.  
At least one valid clock edge must be input during ADV#=L.  
*3: tVSCK and tCLCK are applied to the 1st valid clock edge during ADV#=L.  
126  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Synchronous Read Timing #1 (OE# Control)  
RL=5  
CLK  
t
RCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
Valid  
t
t
t
ASVL  
ASVL  
AHV  
t
t
t
VSCK CKVH  
VSCK  
t
CKVH  
ADV#  
CE#1  
t
VPL  
t
VHVL  
t
VPL  
t
t
ASCL  
ASCL  
t
CLCK  
t
CLCK  
t
CKOH  
t
CP  
OE#  
WE#  
t
t
OLQ  
High  
t
CKBH  
BLQ  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
t
CKTV  
t
OHTZ  
High-Z  
High-Z  
t
OHZ  
t
t
t
t
t
AC  
OLTL  
CKTX  
AC  
AC  
Q
Q
BL  
1
t
t
t
CKQX  
OLZ  
CKQX  
Note:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
127  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Synchronous Read Timing #2 (CE#1 Control)  
RL=5  
CLK  
t
RCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
Valid  
t
t
t
t
t
ASVL  
AHV  
ASVL  
AHV  
t
t
VSCK  
VSC  
t
t
CKVH  
CKVH  
ADV#  
CE#1  
t
VPL  
t
VHVL  
t
VPL  
t
ASCL  
ASCL  
t
CP  
t
CLCK  
t
t
t
CLCK  
CKCLH  
OE#  
WE#  
High  
CKBH  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
t
CKTV  
t
CHTZ  
t
CLTL  
t
CLZ  
t
t
t
t
t
t
CHZ  
CLTL  
CKTX  
AC  
AC  
AC  
Q
Q
BL  
1
t
t
t
CKQX  
CLZ  
CKQX  
Note:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
128  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Synchronous Read Timing #3 (ADV# Control)  
RL=5  
CLK  
t
RCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
Valid  
t
t
t
t
ASVL  
AHV  
ASVL  
AHV  
t
t
VSCK  
VSCK  
t
t
CKVH  
CKVH  
ADV#  
CE#1  
t
VPL  
t
VHVL  
t
VPL  
Low  
Low  
OE#  
WE#  
High  
LB#, UB#  
RDY  
t
CKTV  
t
t
VLTL  
VLTL  
t
t
t
t
AC  
CKTX  
AC  
AC  
Q
Q
BL  
DQ  
1
t
t
CKQX  
CKQX  
Note:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
129  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Synchronous Write Timing #1 (WE# Level Control)  
RL=5  
CLK  
t
WCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
Valid  
t
t
t
t
ASVL  
AHV  
ASVL  
AHV  
t
CKVH  
t
t
VSC  
VSCK  
t
CKVH  
t
t
VHVL  
WRB  
ADV#  
CE#1  
t
t
VPL  
VPL  
t
CLCK  
t
ASCL  
t
ASCL  
t
t
CP  
CLCK  
High  
OE#  
WE#  
t
WLD  
t
t
CKWH  
t
t
BS  
BS  
CKBH  
LB#, UB#  
RDY  
High-Z  
t
t
t
t
t
WLTH  
DSCK  
DSCK  
DSCK  
WHTZ  
D
D
D
DQ  
1
2
BL  
t
t
DHCK  
DHCK  
Note:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
130  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Synchronous Write Timing #2 (WE# Single Clock Pulse Control)  
RL=5  
CLK  
t
WCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
Valid  
t
t
t
t
ASVL  
AHV  
ASVL  
AHV  
t
CKVH  
t
t
VSCK  
VSCK  
t
CKVH  
t
t
VHVL  
ADV#  
CE#1  
t
t
VPL  
VPL  
WRB  
t
CLCK  
t
ASCL  
t
ASCL  
t
t
CLCK  
CP  
CKCLH  
t
High  
OE#  
WE#  
t
t
t
t
WSCK CKWH  
WSCK CKWH  
t
t
t
BS  
BS  
CKBH  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
High-Z  
t
t
t
t
t
t
WLTH  
WLTH  
DSCK  
DSCK  
DSCK  
CHTZ  
D
D
D
1
2
BL  
t
t
DHCK  
DHCK  
Note:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
131  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Synchronous Write Timing #3 (ADV# Control)  
RL=5  
CLK  
t
WCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
Valid  
t
t
t
t
ASVL  
AHV  
ASVL  
AHV  
t
CKVH  
t
t
VSCK  
VSCK  
t
CKVH  
ADV#  
CE#1  
t
t
VHVL  
WRB  
t
t
VPL  
VPL  
High  
OE#  
WE#  
t
t
t
BS  
BS  
CKBH  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
High  
t
t
t
D-  
D-  
D-  
D
D
D
BL  
1
2
t
t
DHCK  
DHCK  
Note:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
132  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Synchronous Write Timing #4 (WE# Level Control, Single Write)  
RL=5  
CLK  
t
WCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
Valid  
t
t
t
t
ASVL  
AHV  
ASVL  
AHV  
t
CKVH  
t
t
VSCK  
VSCK  
t
CKVH  
t
t
VHVL  
ADV#  
CE#1  
t
t
VPL  
VPL  
WRB  
t
t
CLCK  
ASCL  
t
ASCL  
t
t
CP  
CLCK  
High  
OE#  
WE#  
t
WLD  
t
t
CKWH  
CKBH  
t
t
BS  
BS  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
DQ  
High-Z  
t
t
t
t
WLTH  
WLTH  
DSCK  
WHTZ  
D
1
t
DHCK  
Notes*1: This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and single write operation.  
*2: Write data is latched on the valid clock edge.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
133  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Synchronous Read to Write Timing #1(CE#1 Control)  
RL=5  
CLK  
t
WCB  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
t
t
ASVL  
AHV  
t
VSCK  
t
CKVH  
ADV#  
CE#1  
t
VHVL  
t
VPL  
t
t
CKCLH  
CLCK  
t
t
CKCLH  
ASCL  
t
CP  
OE#  
WE#  
t
t
t
CKBH  
BS  
CKBH  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
t
CHTZ  
t
CHZ  
t
t
t
t
t
t
DSCK  
AC  
CLTH  
DSCK  
DSCK  
DSCK  
Q
Q
D
D
D
D
DQ  
BL-1  
BL  
1
2
3
BL  
t
t
t
t
DHCK  
DHCK  
DHCK  
DHCK  
t
t
CKQX  
CKQX  
Note:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
134  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Synchronous Read to Write Timing #2(ADV# Control)  
RL=5  
CLK  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
t
t
ASVL  
AHV  
t
VSCK  
t
CKVH  
ADV#  
CE#1  
t
VPL  
t
VHVL  
t
CKOH  
OE#  
t
t
CKWH  
WLD  
WE#  
t
t
t
CKBH  
CKBH  
BS  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
t
OHTZ  
t
OHZ  
t
t
t
t
t
t
DSCK  
AC  
WLTH  
DSCK  
DSCK  
DSCK  
Q
Q
D
D
D
D
DQ  
BL-1  
BL  
1
2
3
BL  
t
t
t
t
DHCK  
DHCK  
DHCK  
DHCK  
t
t
CKQX  
CKQX  
Note:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
135  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Synchronous Write to Read Timing #1 (CE#1 Control)  
RL=5  
CLK  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
t
t
t
ASVL  
AHV  
VSCK  
t
CKVH  
ADV#  
CE#1  
t
VPL  
t
ASCL  
t
CKCLH  
t
t
CP  
t
CLCK  
WRB  
OE#  
WE#  
t
CKBH  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
t
CKTV  
High-Z  
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
AC  
DSCK  
DSCK  
CHTZ  
CLTL  
CKTX  
AC  
D
D
Q
Q
DQ  
BL-1  
BL  
1
2
t
t
DHCK  
DHCK  
t
t
t
CLZ  
CKQX  
CKQX  
Note:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
136  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Synchronous Write to Read Timing #2 (ADV# Control)  
RL=5  
CLK  
ADDRESS  
Valid  
t
t
ASVL  
AHV  
t
VSCK  
t
CKVH  
ADV#  
CE#1  
t
VPL  
t
WRB  
Low  
OE#  
t
t
OLQ  
BLQ  
t
CKWH  
WE#  
t
CKBH  
LB#, UB#  
WAIT#  
t
CKTV  
High-Z  
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
AC  
DSCK  
DSCK  
WHTZ  
OLTL  
CKTX  
AC  
D
D
Q
Q
DQ  
BL-1  
BL  
1
2
t
t
DHCK  
DHCK  
t
t
t
OLZ  
CKQX  
CKQX  
Note:This timing diagram assumes CE2=H, the valid clock edge on rising edge and BL=8 or 16.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
137  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
POWER-UP Timing #1  
CE#1  
CE2  
*2  
*2  
*3  
t
CHH  
*1  
V
V
min  
IOPS  
IOPS  
0V  
0V  
min *1,*2  
V
V
CCPS  
CCPS  
Notes*1: VDDQ shall be applied and reach the specified minimum level prior to VDD applied.  
*2: The both of CE#1 and CE2 shall be brought to High together with VDDQ prior to VDD applied.  
Otherwise POWER-UP Timing#2 must be applied for proper operation.  
*3: The tCHH specifies after VDD reaches specified minimum level and applicable to both CE#1 and CE2.  
POWER-UP Timing #2  
*3  
CE#1  
t
CHS  
*2  
*2  
t
t
t
CHH  
CSP  
C2LP  
t
t
C2HL  
C2HL  
CE2  
V
*1  
IOPS  
V
min  
IOPS  
0V  
0V  
min *1  
V
V
CCPS  
CCPS  
Notes*1: VDDQ shall be applied and reach specified minimum level prior to VDD applied.  
*2: The tC2HL specifies from CE2 Low to High transition after VDD reaches specified minimum level.  
If CE2 became High prior to VDD reached specified minimum level, tC2HL is defined from VDD minimum.  
*3: CE#1 shall be brought to High prior to or together with CE2 Low to High transition.  
138  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
POWER DOWN Entry and Exit Timing  
CE#1  
CE2  
t
CHS  
t
t
t
(t  
)
CSP  
C2LP  
CHH  
CHHP  
High-Z  
DQ  
Power Down Entry  
Power Down Mode  
Power Down Exit  
Note:This Power Down mode can be also used as a reset timing if POWER-UP timing above could not be satisfied and  
Power-Down program was not performed prior to this reset.  
Standby Entry Timing after Read or Write  
CE#1  
t
t
CHWX  
CHO  
OE#  
WE#  
Active (Read)  
Standby  
Active (Write)  
Standby  
Note:Both tCHOX and tCHWX define the earliest entry timing for Standby mode.  
If either of timing is not satisfied, it takes tRC (min) period for Standby mode from CE#1 Low to High transition.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
139  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Configuration Register Set Timing #1 (Asynchronous Operation)  
t
t
t
t
t
t
RC  
RC  
WC  
WC  
WC  
WC  
MSB*1  
MSB*1  
MSB*1  
MSB*1  
MSB*1  
Key*2  
ADDRESS  
CE#1  
3
t
(t  
*
)
CP  
t
t
t
t
t
CP  
RC  
CP  
CP  
CP  
CP  
OE#  
WE#  
LB#, UB#  
DQ*3  
RDa  
Cycle #1  
RDa  
Cycle #2  
RDa  
Cycle #3  
X
X
RDb  
Cycle #6  
Cycle #4  
Cycle #5  
Notes*1: The all address inputs must be High from Cycle #1 to #5.  
*2: The address key must confirm the format specified in FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION. If not, the operation  
and data are not guaranteed.  
*3: After tCP or tRC following Cycle #6, the Configuration Register Set is completed and returned to the normal  
operation. tCP and tRC are applicable to returning to asynchronous mode and to synchronous mode re-  
spectively.  
140  
128Mb pSRAM  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
TIMING DIAGRAMS (Continued)  
Configuration Register Set Timing #2 (Synchronous Operation)  
CLK  
ADDRESS  
MSB  
t
MSB  
t
MSB  
t
MSB  
t
MSB  
t
Key  
t
RCB  
RCB  
WCB  
WCB  
WCB  
WCB  
ADV#  
CE#1  
t
t
t
t
t
t
TRB  
TRB  
TRB  
TRB  
TRB  
TRB  
OE#  
WE#  
LB#, UB#  
DQ  
RL  
RL-1  
RDa  
Cycle#2  
RL-1  
RDa  
Cycle#3  
RL-1  
RL-1  
RL  
RDa  
Cycle#1  
X
X
RDb  
Cycle#4  
Cycle#5  
Cycle#6  
Notes*1: The all address inputs must be High from Cycle #1 to #5.  
*2: The address key must confirm the format specified in FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION. If not, the operation  
and data are not guaranteed.  
*3: After tTRB following Cycle #6, the Configuration Register Set is completed and returned to the normal  
operation.  
June 28, 2004 S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1  
128Mb pSRAM  
141  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Revision Summary  
Revision A (April 27, 2004)  
Initial release.  
Revision A+1 (June 28, 2004)  
Modify  
Colophon & Company name.  
Trademarks and Notice  
The products described in this document are designed, developed and manufactured as contemplated for general use, including without limitation, ordinary  
industrial use, general office use, personal use, and household use, but are not designed, developed and manufactured as contemplated (1) for any use that  
includes fatal risks or dangers that, unless extremely high safety is secured, could have a serious effect to the public, and could lead directly to death, personal  
injury, severe physical damage or other loss (i.e., nuclear reaction control in nuclear facility, aircraft flight control, air traffic control, mass transport control,  
medical life support system, missile launch control in weapon system), or (2) for any use where chance of failure is intolerable ( i.e., submersible repeater and  
artificial satellite). Please note that Spansion will not be liable to you and/or any third party for any claims or damages arising in connection with above-men-  
tioned uses of the products. Any semiconductor devices have an inherent chance of failure. You must protect against injury, damage or loss from such failures  
by incorporating safety design measures into your facility and equipment such as redundancy, fire protection, and prevention of over-current levels and other  
abnormal operating conditions. If any products described in this document represent goods or technologies subject to certain restrictions on export under  
the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law of Japan, the US Export Administration Regulations or the applicable laws of any other country, the prior au-  
thorization by the respective government entity will be required for export of those products.  
The contents of this document are subject to change without notice.This document may contain information on a SpansionTM product under development by  
Spansion LLC. Spansion LLC reserves the right to change or discontinue work on any product without notice. The information in this document is provided  
as is without warranty or guarantee of any kind as to its accuracy, completeness, operability, fitness for particular purpose, merchantability, non-infringement  
of third-party rights, or any other warranty, express, implied, or statutory. Spansion LLC assumes no liability for any damages of any kind arising out of the  
use of the information in this document.  
Copyright © 2004 Spansion LLC. All rights reserved.  
SpansionTM, the SpansionTM logo, MirrorBit, combinations thereof, and ExpressFlash are trademarks of Spansion LLC. Other company and product names used  
in this publication are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective companies.  
142  
Revision Summary  
S71WS512NE0BFWZZ_00_A1 June 28, 2004  

相关型号:

S71WS512NE0BFWZZ2

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP) Flash Memory and pSRAM CMOS 1.8 Volt
SPANSION

S71WS512NE0BFWZZ3

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP) Flash Memory and pSRAM CMOS 1.8 Volt
SPANSION

S71WS512P

Migrating from the S71WS512N to the S71WS512P
SPANSION

S71WS512PC0HF3

1.8 Volt-only x16 Simultaneous Read/Write, Burst Mode Flash Memory with CellularRAM
SPANSION

S71WS512PC0HF3HL0

1.8 Volt-only x16 Simultaneous Read/Write, Burst Mode Flash Memory with CellularRAM
SPANSION

S71WS512PC0HF3HL2

1.8 Volt-only x16 Simultaneous Read/Write, Burst Mode Flash Memory with CellularRAM
SPANSION

S71WS512PC0HF3HL3

1.8 Volt-only x16 Simultaneous Read/Write, Burst Mode Flash Memory with CellularRAM
SPANSION

S71WS512PC0HF3HR0

1.8 Volt-only x16 Simultaneous Read/Write, Burst Mode Flash Memory with CellularRAM
SPANSION

S71WS512PC0HF3HR2

1.8 Volt-only x16 Simultaneous Read/Write, Burst Mode Flash Memory with CellularRAM
SPANSION

S71WS512PC0HF3HR3

1.8 Volt-only x16 Simultaneous Read/Write, Burst Mode Flash Memory with CellularRAM
SPANSION

S71WS512PC0HF3HV0

1.8 Volt-only x16 Simultaneous Read/Write, Burst Mode Flash Memory with CellularRAM
SPANSION

S71WS512PC0HF3HV2

1.8 Volt-only x16 Simultaneous Read/Write, Burst Mode Flash Memory with CellularRAM
SPANSION